CONTROLS for Your BMW M5 4 Door Seventh Generation (2024-2026)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Roller sunblind 97  
Safety switch 97  
Power windows 94  
Memory function 112  
Seat settings menu 51  
2
3
6
7
Buttons for the central locking system 90  
Unlocking  
4
5
Exterior mirror adjustment button 110  
Seating comfort features  
Locking  
Lights  
34  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Exterior lighting menu 51  
Settings, instrument cluster 136  
Settings for Head-up display 138  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
159  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Driving lights automatic 161  
Low-beam headlights 161  
Adaptive lighting functions 164  
Exterior lighting off 161  
Audio, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-  
munication 6  
Voice control, BMW Intelligent  
Personal Assistant 57  
8
9
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 158  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 158  
Selection of configuration menus  
for instrument cluster and Head-  
up display 136  
Tank ventilation system 327  
Using selection lists 147  
Accessing and resetting trip data  
152  
10 Steering wheel buttons, left  
Turn speed control systems on/off  
Resetting the G-Meter values  
154  
222  
Select speed control system 222  
15 Wiper lever  
Wipers 167  
Store speed 222  
Rain sensor 167  
Adjusting the speed 222  
Cleaning the windshield 168  
11 Sport Boost function 122  
12  
M1 209  
16  
17  
18  
Horn, entire surface  
M2 209  
Adjusting the steering wheel 112  
13 Instrument cluster 136  
Unlocking the hood, behind the  
footwell trim 356  
14 Steering wheel buttons, right  
35  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
19  
Opening and closing cargo area  
82  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 52  
Hazard warning system 372  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
2
Defrost function 283  
Rear window defroster 283  
6
M HYBRID 133  
M Mode 211  
3
4
5
Ventilation 285  
Controller with buttons 54  
Operating elements for entertainment sys-  
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
36  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
7
Parking assistance systems 246  
Dynamic Stability Control 214  
SETUP 209  
9
Selector lever 123  
10  
Turning drive-ready  
state on/off 120  
8
Automatic Hold 132  
Parking brake 129  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 374  
3
Reading lights 165  
2
Camera  
Interior camera 294  
4
5
Fixed glass sunroof 98  
Interior lights 165  
37  
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
6
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 172  
7
Interior lighting menu 51  
38  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
Front camera  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
39  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
Top view cameras  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
Rearview camera  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The rearview camera is located in the handle  
strip on the rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 381.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 383.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
40  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and  
clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 381.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 383.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
41  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors  
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean  
and clear.  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 381.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 383.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
42  
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can be outside of the detection  
ranges of the sensors.  
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed  
bumps.  
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
43  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Operating  
element  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Start/Stop button.  
Volume button.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Idle state  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Principle  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
44  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Warning  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
5. "Turn off after opening door"  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Press and hold the volume but-  
ton on the center console until  
all displays go out.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
Standby state  
Principle  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in standby state after the front  
doors are opened from the outside.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
Manually setting to standby  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
45  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Via the volume button  
Push the volume button on the  
center console. The control dis-  
play and the instrument cluster  
illuminate.  
Warning  
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians  
and other road users might pay less attention  
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Using the Start/Stop button  
Press the Start/Stop button.  
The control display and the instrument  
cluster illuminate.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Warning  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Drive-ready state  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Principle  
The following are the different drive-ready  
state variants:  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
Electric drive-ready state.  
The vehicle is powered by the electric mo-  
tor.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
▷
Starting of combustion engine.  
The vehicle is powered by the combustion  
engine.  
Warning  
Safety information  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
46  
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Combustion engine start  
The combustion engine is started under the  
following conditions when the drive-ready  
state is switched on:  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
▷
The temperature of the hybrid system is  
too high or too low.  
▷
The high-voltage battery has insufficient  
charge.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
1. While the vehicle is stationary, engage se-  
lector lever position P and apply the parking  
brake.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning  
lights on the instrument cluster illuminate  
for different lengths of time depending on  
the duration of the system check.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After parking the vehicle, the hybrid system  
may generate audible operating noises, e.g.,  
when cooling the high-voltage battery.  
If the corresponding requirements are met,  
electric drive-ready state can be used or the  
combustion engine can be started.  
Electric drive-ready state  
General information  
The vehicle is ready for driving without starting  
the combustion engine.  
Functional requirements  
Electric drive-ready state can be used if the  
corresponding requirements for electric drive  
are met.  
Additional information:  
BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 16.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the drive-ready state  
is switched on, READY is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
47  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Main menu  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into different areas.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Overview  
Principle  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-  
ating concept and includes a wide range of  
functions.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
1
Menu bar  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
2
3
4
Widgets  
Via the Controller.  
Status information  
Climate bar, A/C 276  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Via the operating elements on the steering  
wheel.  
Menu bar  
Additional information:  
Apps menu  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 136.  
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A  
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the  
filter to see the apps you want.  
Safety information  
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-  
played.  
Warning  
▷
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are  
displayed.  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
48  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-  
tions are displayed.  
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-  
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.  
"Recently used": The most recently used  
apps are displayed.  
Status information  
General information  
Media menu  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons. Depending on the  
equipment and national-market version, differ-  
ent icons are available.  
Access to functions of the entertainment  
system, e.g., radio stations or connection with  
external devices.  
Communication menu  
Access to the telephone and message  
function as well as the connection and man-  
agement of mobile devices such as smart-  
phones.  
Telephone status information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Active call.  
Navigation menu  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Access to the navigation system, destina-  
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest.  
Entertainment status information  
Climate menu  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Time shift.  
Apple CarPlay© menu  
Depending on the national-market version  
with a connected function: access to Apple  
CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the secure  
use of certain functions of a compatible Apple  
iPhone via iDrive.  
Wi-Fi.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto© menu  
Depending on the national-market version  
with a connected function: access to Android  
Auto. Android Auto enables the secure use  
of certain functions of a compatible Android  
smartphone via iDrive.  
Android Auto.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Status information messages  
Icon Meaning  
Widgets  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as current media or paired  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
49  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Icon Meaning  
Icon  
Function  
Suppress private information.  
Confirm entry.  
Do not disturb.  
Message.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Entry comparison  
Additional information:  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Other status information  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
For some functions, audio confirmation is  
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating  
the control display.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound active.  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Sound"  
Input and display  
Letters and numbers  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Quick access  
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,  
certain settings, and app recommendations.  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
50  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Input  
Operation  
Show  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
Deleting shortcuts  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3. "Delete shortcut"  
Hide  
Direct access  
Activating/deactivating pop-ups  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
General information  
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to  
access menus for the respective function di-  
rectly on the control display. Then continue the  
operation via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
Overview  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Button Function  
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-  
tween the steering wheel and driv-  
er’s door.  
Shortcuts  
General information  
Go to the Interior Lighting menu on  
the headliner.  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the  
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance  
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone  
numbers and menu entries.  
Go to the Seat Settings menu on the  
driver’s door.  
Storing a function  
1. Select the desired function.  
2. Press and hold the desired function.  
3. "Add to shortcuts"  
BMW Curved Display  
Principle  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
Executing a function  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2. Tap the desired shortcut.  
51  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
Warning  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 384.  
Overview  
Overview  
1
Instrument cluster 136  
Control display 52  
Control display.  
2
Switching the control display on/off  
automatically  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Control display  
Principle  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
Safety information  
Switching the control display on/off  
manually  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
2. "Screen off"  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
52  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
4. "Control display"  
Buttons on the Controller  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Make the desired setting.  
Button  
Function  
Call up the main menu.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Go to Media menu.  
Go to Phone menu.  
Go to Navigation menu.  
Go to previous menu.  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Controller  
Principle  
Operation  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
Overview  
▷
Press the Controller to select a menu  
option, for example.  
Controller  
53  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
Selecting a widget  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
3. Press the Controller.  
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
▷
Press the button.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Operating via the Controller  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
1. Select the desired menu item using the  
Controller.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
The main menu is displayed.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
2. Press the Controller.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can only be entered  
when stationary.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
54  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Input  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Additional information:  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 60.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
Deleting an entry  
Icon Function  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
Additional information:  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 60.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Entering special characters  
Function  
Operation  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad.  
The touchpad is located on the Controller.  
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not  
use any objects.  
Tap the map on the control display and then  
continue operation using the touchpad.  
Selecting functions  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
55  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The widget is deleted.  
Function  
Operation  
▷
Press and hold the widget and drag to  
the left or right.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
The widget is moved to the desired po-  
sition.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
Sorting apps  
Using alphabetical lists  
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-  
sired icon and move it to the desired location.  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
Switching between menus  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
Select the arrow symbol.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Operation via control display  
General information  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
Press and hold the desired menu item.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
The main menu is displayed.  
Adjusting widgets  
The widgets can be adjusted in the main  
menu. The adjustments can only be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. If necessary, tap the  
display.  
icon or control  
1. If necessary,  
tap the icon.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
2. Press and hold the widget.  
3. Make the desired adjustment:  
▷
Tap on the icon.  
A new widget can be selected.  
Tap on the icon.  
▷
56  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting an entry  
General information  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
Icon Function  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
▷
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and front passenger side.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Function  
Operation  
▷
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 60.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-  
tions:  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 60.  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
For all settings under  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Data protection, refer to page 68.  
Activation word, refer to page 58.  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
▷
▷
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
▷
Suggestions, refer to page 60.  
Principle  
Activating the voice control system  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate  
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions  
and automating habits.  
General information  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
57  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
sonal activation word can also be changed or  
deleted.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition.  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary  
for the activation word and does not need to  
be spoken.  
Speaking the activation word.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set"  
1.  
Press button briefly.  
9. "Start recording"  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Depending on national-market version, some  
third-party providers offer digital voice assis-  
tants, e.g., Amazon Alexa.  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
Saying the activation word will start the Per-  
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-  
tens.  
The activation word from connected third-  
party providers can be used in addition to your  
preset or personal activation word from BMW.  
Preset activation word  
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can  
be activated and deactivated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
5. "Additional speech assistants"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Canceling voice control  
7. ""Hello BMW""  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
Personal activation word  
In addition to the preset activation word, a  
personal activation word can be set up with  
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-  
›Cancel‹  
58  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
3. "Personal Assistant"  
4. "Help"  
5. "Example commands"  
Possible commands  
Sample commands for the current context are  
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant widget.  
General information  
Commands can be used to give instructions  
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant  
providing assistance.  
Additional information:  
Adjust widgets, refer to page 56.  
For example, you can call contacts, navigate  
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions  
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions  
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the  
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they are  
displayed on the control display. You do not  
have to follow the order of the menu items  
when speaking them out loud.  
Most content on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list  
entries.  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›Media‹  
Help for voice control  
3. ›Presets‹  
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example  
commands suggested.  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands  
for voice control announced.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed  
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function  
is available depending on the national-market  
version. The speech recognition and quality of  
the feedback may vary.  
Additional example commands for the cur-  
rent context are displayed in the widget of  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Sample commands  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
Example command: ›How can the passenger  
airbag be deactivated?‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Play a classical music station‹  
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›Increase the ACC distance‹  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
59  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Suggestions  
Settings  
General information  
Setting the system language  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Language"  
Activating/deactivating suggestions  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
Setting the response length  
You can set the Personal Assistant to use  
standard dialog or a short version. In case of  
the short version, the announcements by the  
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-  
breviated version.  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Receive suggestions"  
Adapting suggestions  
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by  
category or to output a signal tone.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Speaking during voice output  
Online speech processing  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-  
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-  
tionally, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required  
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is  
available depending on the national-market  
version. Online speech processing is not avail-  
able in all languages.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
60  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Online speech processing"  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Visualization"  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be enabled by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
1. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. Press and hold the  
button on the  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Long press"  
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the  
smartphone.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Voice control in rear  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Personal  
Assistant can be started and operated from  
the rear by saying the activation word.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-  
pending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant  
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For  
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-  
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-  
cle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Rear voice control"  
Functional requirements  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.  
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.  
61  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in  
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa  
app to set it up in the vehicle.  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
3. "Amazon Alexa"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
A poor data connection affects the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
search function.  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
Information about the active function is dis-  
played on the control display. If the function  
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as  
necessary.  
Principle  
Various connection modes are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and desired function.  
Automating routines  
General information  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic opening of windows  
in the same place. Rules are created for this  
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-  
vated at any time.  
General information  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection modes is provided in the following me-  
dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
Activating/deactivating routines  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Automate habits"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
System limits  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
62  
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
Overview  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and suitable connection modes for them.  
The range of functions depends on the vehicle  
equipment and the mobile device.  
Function  
Connection mode  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Playing music from a USB device.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 291.  
63  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
Vehicle features and options  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Data protection, refer to page 68.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Manual search  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
64  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
Download of an upgrade  
Information about the version  
Automatic download  
General information  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Via My BMW App  
If an upgrade is available, information on the  
new software version is displayed in the My  
BMW App.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
Displaying information  
Display in the vehicle:  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5.  
▷
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version:"  
You do not need to be present in the vehicle to  
download the data to a mobile device.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Info on version"  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
 
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
Installing the upgrade  
General information  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
65  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
The installation may take around 20 to  
30 minutes.  
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-  
stallation is terminated.  
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the cargo area.  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
Charging the vehicle is interrupted due to  
the installation.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
Following the successful installation, charg-  
ing the vehicle may not continue automati-  
cally.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
Installing immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
Installing with timer  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
When the trip is completed, a timer can be  
used to install the upgrade automatically at  
a configured time such as during the night. It  
may also be helpful to install the upgrade at  
a later time so that all functional requirements  
are met, e.g., to allow the engine to cool suf-  
ficiently or the vehicle battery to charge suffi-  
ciently.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after charging the battery for a longer period of  
time.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Preparing the vehicle  
2. "All apps"  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The installation starts automatically when:  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent to the  
66  
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
After a longer stationary period, recharge the  
vehicle battery with the charging cable as nec-  
essary.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
Malfunction  
Installing via the My BMW App  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the My  
BMW App.  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
Horn.  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.  
Lock the charging socket flap.  
Exit warning if needed.  
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window  
may no longer close completely.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
67  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data transfer  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
Settings  
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting data  
1.  
Apps menu  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Additional information:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 68.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Reset vehicle data  
Principle  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
68  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must  
be in the vehicle.  
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver  
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock  
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital  
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver  
profile. After unlocking, you can change the  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when  
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the  
guest profile.  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only  
possible when the vehicle has cellular network  
reception.  
BMW ID/driver profiles  
Principle  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is  
the personal login for all relevant offers for the  
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the  
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle  
settings.  
Welcome window  
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window  
is shown on the control display. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal  
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.  
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW  
ID or driver profile:  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-  
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If  
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it  
are applied to the vehicle.  
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a  
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.  
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not  
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-  
file:  
General information  
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW  
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered  
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to  
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver  
profile.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW  
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-  
thorized service center.  
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:  
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW  
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the  
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-  
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is  
used to log in.  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the  
driver profile can be changed.  
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on  
or the control display is tapped outside of the  
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.  
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs or seven  
driver profiles.  
69  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
It may be necessary to log in again with the  
BMW ID.  
Adding the BMW ID  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal  
image on the status bar.  
2. "Add BMW ID"  
This icon is displayed on the status bar  
and indicates when it is necessary to login  
again.  
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Another login will be attempted. Once suc-  
cessfully logged in, all functions can be used  
again.  
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App  
on your smartphone and saved your  
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically  
transferred to the vehicle.  
My BMW app  
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a  
new BMW ID can be registered.  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,  
the vehicle is automatically added to the My  
BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-  
ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user  
management.  
5. Select the other settings you want to  
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition  
as desired.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
To configure driver recognition, the corre-  
sponding vehicle key or digital key must be  
detected in the vehicle.  
Driver recognition can be set or changed in  
the settings at a later time.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
6. Change any additional settings as neces-  
sary.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed  
on the control display in the corresponding ve-  
hicle.  
Creating a driver profile  
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not  
available, driver profiles can be created.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
2. "Add driver profile"  
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
"Transfer settings"  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized  
service center and added to the vehicle, you  
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:  
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-  
tings of the guest profile will be applied.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
Primary user  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
70  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
primary user can be defined by an authorized  
service center.  
gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID  
or the assigned driver profile.  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
If another key is detected on the driver's  
door after activating the BMW ID or the  
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-  
file of the last key detected is activated.  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-  
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-  
tings.  
Create the main digital key.  
Setting synchronization  
If synchronization is switched on, settings from  
the following areas, for example, are continu-  
ously synchronized:  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Automatic driver recognition  
If driver recognition has been established, au-  
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file is triggered by the following actions:  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
digital key must be carried with you.  
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-  
tivation word.  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned digital key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the digital key.  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and home lights.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when you log in for the first time:  
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s  
seat position or temperature setting.  
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to  
the following priority:  
▷
Data protection menu.  
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or  
the assigned driver profile.  
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be  
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select  
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome  
window.  
The guest profile is activated when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-  
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.  
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-  
tected at the same time, the digital key trig-  
71  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed  
at any time via iDrive:  
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
"Change driver profile"  
3.  
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or  
the desired driver profile.  
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes  
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW  
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized  
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the  
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is  
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-  
moved, the guest profile is activated.  
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,  
the stored settings are loaded.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated and  
changed by anyone.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the  
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with  
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the  
BMW Cloud will be retained.  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a  
driver profile has not yet been created.  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-  
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from  
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-  
responding BMW IDs are removed from the  
vehicle.  
▷
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key  
that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
The following limitations apply to the guest  
profile:  
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is  
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and  
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.  
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or  
a driver profile can be used to view or change  
the stored personal settings.  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection  
to the guest profile.  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-  
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can  
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the  
driver profile.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
Additional information:  
3. "Continue as guest"  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
72  
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Settings  
System limits  
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or  
the digital key may not always be possible in  
the following cases, for example:  
General information  
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-  
ating a driver profile can be changed.  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver  
profile are located in the outer area on the  
driver's side of the vehicle.  
2. "Settings"  
The following settings are available for the  
BMW ID:  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My  
BMW App.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.  
The personal salutation.  
The following settings are available for the  
driver profile:  
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The profile name.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profile picture"  
4. "Select profile picture"  
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can  
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW  
App. This requires that the synchronization  
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-  
tings. After transferring the profile picture from  
the My BMW App, you can only select one of  
the predefined images if the profile picture in  
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization  
is deactivated.  
73  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Pre-conditioning, refer to page 286.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Displaying the charging screen, refer  
to page 150.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Open the cargo area.  
Panic mode.  
Safety information  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 163.  
Warning  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
74  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-  
ing.  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive side facing down.  
NOTICE  
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle  
key.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of property damage. Always replace the dis-  
charged battery with a battery with the same  
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-  
cation.  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It  
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-  
teries together with household waste.  
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-  
cle key to the side.  
Integrated key  
General information  
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-  
ually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
75  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
Removing the integrated key  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and  
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-  
move it from the side.  
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
4. Open the driver's door.  
5. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open  
side of the vehicle key.  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door  
opener of the other doors from the inside.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close all doors.  
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
76  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
3. Lock the door lock using the integrated key,  
turning it clockwise. Turn the key approx.  
50°, beyond the resistance point, to the  
stop.  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
5. With the integrated key, close and lock the  
front passenger door using the side door  
lock.  
4. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
5. Close the driver's door.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
If vehicle is de-energized:  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
1. With the integrated key, close and lock all  
doors, except the driver's door, using the  
side door lock.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
If the doors are manually locked from the in-  
side, the alarm system is not activated.  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
2. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
77  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
1. To turn on drive-ready state via emergency  
detection of the vehicle key, hold the back  
of the vehicle key to the marking on the  
steering column. Pay attention to the dis-  
play in the instrument cluster.  
Access to vehicle interior  
Safety information  
Warning  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Warning  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
Fault of the radio link while charging the  
vehicle.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
78  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
▷
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
▷
All doors and the cargo area are locked.  
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
▷
▷
▷
Only the driver's door will be unlocked or all  
access to the vehicle will be unlocked.  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
With the vehicle key  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
If only the driver's door has been unlocked due  
to the settings, press the button on the vehicle  
key again to unlock the other vehicle access  
points.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 163.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
All vehicle access points are locked.  
79  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
2. Touch the grooved surface on the door  
handle of a closed front door with your fin-  
ger for approx. 1 second without reaching  
into the recessed grip.  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Depending on national-market version, the ve-  
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the  
door handle using a compatible smartphone  
and digital key.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to unlock and lock using the digital  
key.  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
Unlock vehicle  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear  
of the vehicle.  
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.  
80  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-  
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital  
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to  
do so.  
With the Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 86.  
If someone is detected on a seat while locking  
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door will be unlocked, note the following:  
The driver's door and the charging socket flap  
will only be unlocked when the driver is within  
the unlocking zone of the driver's door.  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
With the BMW Digital Key  
Principle  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
81  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
Access to the cargo area  
Additional information:  
General information  
It may not be possible to open the cargo area  
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
Additional information:  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 90.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
Warning  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the cargo area  
are closed.  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of prop-  
erty damage. Make sure that the travel path  
of the trunk lid is clear while opening and  
closing.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
With the vehicle key  
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option  
to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-  
led on a smartphone.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
82  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
You must enable the setting for opening with  
the vehicle key.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the cargo area.  
Additional information:  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the cargo  
area.  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
Opening the cargo area  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Closing the cargo area  
On the cargo area  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the trunk.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
compatible smartphones with a digital key are  
also detected automatically. In this case, the  
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.  
Press the button on the trunk.  
The vehicle is locked after closing  
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-  
er's door must be closed and the vehicle  
key must be outside of the vehicle near the  
cargo area.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Pull the trunk lid down slightly. The trunk lid  
closes automatically.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to detect the digital key.  
Inside the vehicle  
Opening the cargo area  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
within the vehicle in order to close the cargo  
area using the button inside the vehicle.  
Opening the trunk  
Press the button in the driver's door.  
83  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing the cargo area  
Opening and closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
Pull and hold the button in the driver's  
door.  
Principle  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is  
closed.  
You can open the cargo area contactlessly  
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.  
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo  
area can also be closed contactlessly.  
Interruption of the opening  
procedure  
The opening procedure is interrupted in the  
following situations:  
Sensors detect specific foot movements near  
the center of the rear area, and the cargo area  
opens or closes.  
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the  
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,  
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-  
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is  
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make  
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch  
the vehicle.  
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing it again opens the cargo area  
again.  
Functional requirements  
▷
To close the cargo area contactlessly, the  
automatic tailgate must be installed.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.  
84  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Contactless opening and closing of the  
cargo area must be activated in the set-  
tings.  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-  
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open  
the cargo area again.  
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to open and close the cargo area  
contactlessly using the digital key.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
▷
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
▷
The trailer power socket must be unoccu-  
pied.  
Additional information:  
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
Opening the cargo area  
1. To open the cargo area hands-free, walk  
behind the vehicle and hold the vehicle key  
in the middle at approx. arm’s length.  
Movement in range of the sensors may cause  
the cargo area to open or close unintentionally,  
e.g., when objects are lifted quickly in the vehi-  
cle rear or due to the moving brushes in a car  
wash. To prevent such unintended opening of  
the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle  
key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the  
vehicle.  
2. Move your foot under the vehicle in the  
driving direction and pull it back immedi-  
ately. During these movements, the leg  
must pass through the range of the sensor.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects  
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be detected  
if the trailer power socket is not plugged in.  
Emergency cargo area release  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-  
ing system flashes.  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-  
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will  
close the cargo area again.  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The cargo area is unlocked.  
Closing the cargo area  
Perform the foot movement for opening the  
cargo area.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
Malfunction  
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-  
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow  
and smooth motion.  
85  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down  
lightly. Closing occurs automatically.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Key Card  
Activating Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
1. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
2. Follow instructions on the control display.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Deactivating Key Card  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Safety information  
5. "Key Card"  
NOTICE  
6. "Deactivate Key Card"  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is  
a risk of property damage. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
Additional information:  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
86  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is  
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the  
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be  
given to another person, they can be given the  
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,  
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
Additional information:  
1. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.  
Key Card, refer to page 86.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
 
Functional requirements  
Malfunction  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
BMW Digital Key  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the digital key.  
Principle  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a digital key.  
Enabling the main digital key  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital  
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-  
play.  
87  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,  
or via iDrive.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
If the smartphone associated with a shared  
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it  
will be deleted immediately.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
Deletion via iDrive  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. Delete the Digital Key.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
Deleting digital keys  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Deleting a shared key  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the master Digital Key, using the  
5. "Reset function"  
88  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-  
lows:  
Changing smartphones  
▷
▷
Using the door handle.  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-  
tional-market version, the vehicle can be  
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-  
tion.  
BMW Digital Key availability and function-  
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
Using the smartphone tray  
System limits  
With a digital key, the alarm system's interior  
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can only  
be deactivated using the control display.  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 93.  
1. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
Inside the vehicle  
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending  
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-  
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.  
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-  
ready state.  
Fault of the connection from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-  
ings or metal objects.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
89  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening the door  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Pull the door opener above the arm-  
General information  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
rest.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
Overview  
Valet parking mode  
Principle  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled.  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
valet parking mode may not be available.  
Lock.  
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-  
tions:  
Unlock.  
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via  
iDrive.  
Locking the vehicle  
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-  
file cannot be changed.  
Press the button in the driver's door  
or front passengers door with the front  
doors closed.  
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.  
The audio system is muted, with the possi-  
ble volume of the audio system being lim-  
ited.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
▷
▷
▷
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned  
off.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
The availability of certain settings of the  
driving modes is limited.  
Press the button in the driver's door or  
front passenger’s door.  
The M1 and M2 buttons on the steering  
wheel are not active.  
90  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Unlocking and locking  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.  
Doors  
1.  
Functional requirement  
Apps menu  
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a  
BMW ID.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. "Unlock"  
Activating the valet parking mode  
1.  
Apps menu  
6. Select the desired setting:  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
5. "Lock tailgate"  
Only the driver's door is unlocked.  
Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi-  
cle.  
The cargo area is locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
▷
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
6. If necessary, "PIN"  
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-  
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The  
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-  
ing mode.  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Comfort access"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
8. "Activate valet parking mode"  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock  
screen.  
Automatic unlocking  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2.  
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the  
access data for the BMW ID.  
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have  
an assigned PIN: enter the access data  
for the BMW ID.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P"  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
Settings  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
Automatic locking  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
91  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened.  
▷
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
5. "Lock after a short time"  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is  
already unlocked"  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with the  
vehicle key.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
▷
"Lock tailgate button"  
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key is disabled.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
▷
"Flash when unlocking"  
Opening/closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.  
"Flash when locking"  
1.  
Apps menu  
Locking is confirmed by one flash.  
With alarm system:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Closing the sun protection  
automatically  
It is possible to configure whether the roller  
sunblind closes automatically when the vehicle  
is locked.  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Close roof blind automatically"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Cargo area  
Cargo area and doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
92  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
Alarm system  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo  
area.  
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the  
vehicle is locked from the outside.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-  
cle is locked manually from the inside.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched off as soon as  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate  
93  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
Alarm system error.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-  
cle is locked.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
The alarm has been triggered.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
Ending the alarm  
Unlock the vehicle.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
Window  
The windows must be closed for the system to  
function properly.  
General information  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is  
useful if you frequently use the same parking  
garage, for example.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 57.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
In duplex garages.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
94  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Depending on national-market version, the  
windows can also be closed via the door han-  
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital  
key.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance  
in your pants pocket.  
With the vehicle key  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-  
ital key.  
Opening windows  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Closing the windows  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Closing the windows  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key after lock-  
ing.  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Touch the grooved surface on the door handle  
of a closed front door with your finger and hold  
it there without grasping the recessed grip.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
In addition to locking, the windows also closed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
95  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Inside the vehicle  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Overview  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
Power windows  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional requirements  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Opening windows  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
1. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
The window opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
Closing the windows  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
2. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
96  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Operating the rear roller blind  
Window roller sunblinds  
Safety information  
Warning  
On the driver’s door  
Press the button on the driver's door to  
open the rear roller blind if closed or to  
close the rear roller blind if open.  
With closed roller sunblinds and open win-  
dows, the roller sunblinds may be strained  
while driving due to the air stream. The roller  
sunblinds may be damaged and vehicle oc-  
cupants may be harmed. There is a risk of  
injury. Do not open the windows while driving  
if the roller sunblinds are closed.  
If the button is pressed again while moving,  
the rear roller blind moves in the opposite di-  
rection.  
System limits  
If you can no longer move the rear roller blind  
after pressing the button several times, the  
overheating protection has activated. The sys-  
tem is disabled for a limited time to prevent  
overheating. Let the system cool down.  
NOTICE  
When operating the roller sunblind, objects  
stored on the rear shelf may damage the  
roller sunblind. There is a risk of property  
damage. Make sure that the area of move-  
ment of the roller sunblind is clear during the  
operation.  
Safety switch  
Principle  
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-  
dren, for instance, from opening and closing  
the rear windows using the switches in the  
rear.  
Overview  
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the  
safety function is switched off automatically.  
Overview  
Rear window roller blind button.  
Operating the side roller blinds  
Pull out the side roller sunblind using the loop  
and hook it onto the holder.  
The safety switch is located on the  
driver's door.  
97  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turning the safety functions on/off  
On the door handle  
To activate/deactivate the safety func-  
tion, press the safety switch on the  
driver’s door.  
Principle  
The sun protection can be closed using the  
door handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The LED in the button illuminates when the  
safety function is switched on.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Glass sunroof  
Depending on the country, the sun protection  
can also be closed with the door handle using  
a compatible smartphone and a digital key.  
General  
The glass sunroof sun protection can be  
opened or closed.  
Additional information:  
The sun protection opens from rear to front.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
With the vehicle key  
Functional prerequisites  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance  
in your pants pocket.  
Opening the sun protection  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone to close the sun protection using the  
digital key.  
The glass sunroof sun protection is opened  
as long as the button on the vehicle key is  
pressed.  
Closing the sun protection  
Closing the sun protection  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key in close  
range of the vehicle after locking.  
The glass sunroof sun protection is closed  
as long as the button on the vehicle key is  
pressed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Touch the grooved surface on the door handle  
of a closed front door with your finger and hold  
it there without grasping the recessed grip.  
Besides locking the vehicle, the windows and  
sun protection will be closed and locked.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
98  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
Push switch up.  
switched on.  
The sun protection moves to a  
defined position to provide par-  
tial shading.  
Inside the vehicle  
Functional requirements  
Pressing the switch again closes  
the sun protection.  
The sun protection can be operated under the  
following conditions:  
Control display  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Operation  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
Button in the headliner  
Overview  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Sun blinds"  
5. Select the desired function.  
Closing the sun protection  
automatically  
The sun protection closes automatically when  
the vehicle is locked.  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the sun protec-  
tion moves to its last position.  
This function can be deactivated in the set-  
tings, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Opening/closing the sun protec-  
tion.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 91.  
Initializing after a power interruption  
Operation  
General information  
▷
▷
The sun protection is closed  
as long as the switch is held  
down.  
If the power is interrupted while opening or  
closing, the sun protection can only be oper-  
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system  
can help in this case.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection.  
The system can be initialized under the follow-  
ing conditions:  
▷
▷
The sun protection closes automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
The sun protection opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-  
alization is completed.  
The drive-ready state is established.  
99  
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without the anti-trap mechanism.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Initializing the system  
Press the switch up and hold  
it until the initialization is com-  
plete:  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
▷
If the sun protection is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
▷
If the sun protection is open, it closes first,  
then opens and closes again.  
Initialization is complete once the sun protec-  
tion has opened then closed again.  
100  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 101.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 104.  
Head restraints, refer to page 107.  
Airbags, refer to page 170.  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Seats  
Overview  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
The switches for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
101  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat settings menu  
Adjusting seat tilt  
The seat adjustment menu button is located  
on the front door.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Press the button to go directly to the  
seat settings menu on the control dis-  
play.  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
Press switch forward or backward.  
General information  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
Adjusting the height  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select driver’s seat.  
5. "Use automatically"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Press switch up or down.  
102  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
When exiting the vehicle, the backrest width  
opens completely. The last set position is au-  
tomatically applied before you start driving.  
Thigh support  
Multifunctional seat  
1.  
Apps menu  
Adjusting the backrest width  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Seat comfort"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. Select the desired function.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Lumbar support  
Calibrating the front seats  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
▷
Press the front/rear section of the  
button:  
Safety information  
The curvature is increased/de-  
creased.  
Warning  
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-  
ton:  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
The curvature is shifted up/down.  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar  
support at very high and very low tempera-  
tures.  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward for approx. 2 seconds until the seat  
stops.  
Backrest width  
Principle  
2. Repeat step 1 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly forward.  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
3. Press the switch forward for approx. 2 sec-  
onds again until the seat stops.  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
4. Repeat step 3 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly backward.  
103  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on  
the left and right.  
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is  
intended for the person sitting in the middle.  
Additional information:  
Comfort exit  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 101.  
Principle  
Safety information  
The seat position can be adjusted automati-  
cally to make it easier to get in and out of the  
vehicle.  
Warning  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
▷
The backrest width completely opens tem-  
porarily.  
▷
The seat moves back.  
Activating/deactivating the setting  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. "Comfort exit"  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Seat belts  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only  
offer protection when adjusted correctly.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
104  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
Middle seat belt in the rear  
Buckling the seat belt  
Correct use of seat belts  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
105  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
1. Release buckle tongue from the fixture on  
the rear shelf.  
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt  
lock, arrow 1.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the seat  
belt buckle, arrow 2.  
The seat belt buckles must engage audibly.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the buckle  
tongue, arrow 1.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
Rear Occupant Alert  
4. Guide the seat belt to the fixture on the rear  
shelf.  
Principle  
At the end of a trip, the system informs the  
driver of the possible presence of occupants on  
the rear seats.  
Seat belt reminder  
General information  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
General information  
If a door with access to the rear seat row is  
operated within 30 minutes before starting a  
drive, a notice appears on the control display  
and a signal tone sounds at the end of the  
drive.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the  
notice is displayed again after the drive is com-  
plete.  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "System settings"  
106  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Safety mode  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver  
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-  
matically tightened once after driving off, if the  
seat belt is fastened.  
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,  
during emergency braking, the front seat belts  
are automatically pretensioned.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
After a critical driving situation without an acci-  
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If  
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-  
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the  
seat belt before continuing to drive.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
Front head restraints  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
General information  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the head re-  
straints move to the lowest position after the  
vehicle is exited. The last set position is auto-  
matically applied before you start driving.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Adjusting the height: Electric head  
restraints  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Press switch up or down.  
107  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting the distance  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Removing the head restraints  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
Adjusting the height of the outer  
head restraints  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
Adjusting the height of the center  
head restraint  
To improve your view to the rear, you can ad-  
just the center head restraint so that it is fully  
down. Set it to the lowest position only if no  
one will be sitting in the center seat.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
108  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Integrated key, refer to page 74.  
▷
▷
To lower: press the buttons, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
4. Press and hold the integrated key and the  
button at the same time, arrows 1, and pull  
out the head restraint completely.  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
Removing the outer head restraint  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the seat in question.  
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in ques-  
tion.  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to  
page 302.  
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
Removing the center head restraint  
3. Insert the integrated key.  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the center seat.  
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
2. Press the buttons, arrow 1, and pull the  
head restraint out completely.  
109  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Installing the head restraints  
Overview  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
Exterior mirrors  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's  
side exterior mirror also dims automatically.  
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to  
control this.  
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic  
Curb Monitor.  
Select right exterior mirror.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior  
mirrors are heated automatically as necessary  
and when drive-ready state is on.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Safety information  
Press the button.  
The selected exterior mirror moves  
along with the button movement.  
Warning  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
▷
Press the button to select the left  
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.  
▷
Press the button to select the right  
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
110  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
1.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
NOTICE  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold  
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Press the button. The LED illuminates  
and the LED of the driver’s side outside  
mirror goes out.  
Press the button.  
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to  
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
General information  
On narrow roads.  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
Photocells are used for control:  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Overview  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
Functional requirements  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
111  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Memory function  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-  
cle is stationary only.  
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: steering  
wheel position.  
▷
Height of the Head-up display.  
Safety information  
Electric steering wheel adjustment  
General information  
Warning  
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-  
tion when the vehicle is stationary.  
The current steering wheel position can be  
stored using the memory function.  
To make it easier to enter and get out of the  
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily  
into the upper position.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the travel  
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-  
ment.  
Adjusting the steering wheel position  
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel  
forward/back position and height to the seat  
position.  
112  
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Calling up settings  
Using the button:  
Memory function  
Overview  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
Via iDrive:  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
Icon  
Meaning  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Seat position"  
SET button.  
6. Select the desired seat position.  
Memory button 1.  
Memory button 2.  
Seat climate control  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Storing settings  
Using the button:  
Climate control, refer to page 276.  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
3. Press the desired memory button as long  
as the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select desired seat.  
5. "Seat position"  
6. Save the desired seat position.  
113  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Children in the rear seat  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
General information  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
114  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
General information  
When using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 172.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
115  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
On the front passenger seat  
Child seat security  
Deactivating the airbag  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
After mounting a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front  
passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-  
bag, refer to page 172.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
Seat position and height  
After mounting a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, to the lowest position. This  
seat position and height ensure the best pos-  
sible position for the belt and offers optimal  
protection in the event of an accident.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that  
the belt is not constrained.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
Lower anchors for child  
restraint systems  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
116  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for lower anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Before installing a child restraint system, pull  
the seat belt away from the lower anchors of  
the child restraint system.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Installing child restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
117  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Warning  
Routing the retaining strap  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
Warning  
1
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Rear shelf  
Seat backrest  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Open the attachment point cover.  
2. Raise the head restraint.  
3. Guide the upper strap between the head  
restraint rods, or along both sides of the  
head restraint rods, to the attachment  
point.  
Center seat: Guide the upper strap between  
the head restraint rods, or along both sides  
118  
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
of the head restraint rods, to the attach-  
ment point.  
Safety switch for rear  
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
5. Tighten the retaining strap.  
Locking the doors and  
windows in the rear  
Press the button on the driver's door.  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-  
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance  
when transporting children.  
Various functions are locked and can-  
not be operated in the rear such as the  
power windows.  
Doors  
Unlock or lock the safety switch on the rear  
doors using the integrated key. To lock, turn in  
the corresponding arrow direction on the door.  
The door can now be opened from the outside  
only.  
After locking, make sure that the door cannot  
be opened from the inside.  
119  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Overview  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Start/Stop button  
Start/Stop button  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-  
ready state on/off.  
Driving off  
1. Close the driver's door.  
2. Depress brake pedal.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
General information  
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake  
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop  
button.  
4. Engage the desired selector lever position,  
e.g., D or R.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns  
drive-ready state back off and turns standby  
state back on.  
5. Release the parking brake.  
6. To drive off, release the brake pedal and  
press the accelerator pedal.  
Drive-ready state cannot be turned on as long  
as the charging cable is connected or the  
charging socket cover is open.  
If necessary, the combustion engine starts  
automatically.  
Additional information:  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 46.  
Standby state, refer to page 45.  
Charging cable, refer to page 316.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection  
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-  
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.  
▷
With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready  
state turned on, as soon as the selector  
lever position P is exited.  
▷
With electric drive up to approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the  
environment. As a result, other road users,  
120  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better  
perceive the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Electric driving  
▷
The high-voltage battery charge is suffi-  
ciently high.  
Functions while driving  
▷
The high-voltage battery temperature is not  
too low and not too high.  
General information  
The drive power is a combination of the inter-  
nal combustion engine and the electric drive.  
If required, the high-voltage battery is charged  
at the same time. The hybrid system starts the  
combustion engine automatically.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D or R engaged.  
The accelerator pedal is not pressed with  
too much force.  
▷
The possible maximum speed for electric  
drive is not exceeded.  
With electric drive, the vehicle is powered by  
the electric motor.  
Automatic starting of the combustion  
engine while driving  
Depending on vehicle configuration, the com-  
bustion engine is automatically started when  
driving under conditions such as the following:  
For electric drive and driving with the combus-  
tion engine, the corresponding requirements  
must be met.  
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en-  
ergy. To optimize acceleration and to reduce  
fuel consumption, the electric motor boosts the  
combustion engine.  
▷
When accelerating heavily or on uphill  
grades.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond  
the resistance point at the full throttle posi-  
tion, kickdown.  
Depending on the charge state of the high-  
voltage battery, maximum speed, the vehicle's  
capacity to accelerate, and range can vary.  
▷
▷
The charge state of the high-voltage bat-  
tery is insufficient.  
System performance is reduced if the charge is  
low. Acceleration capacity may change notice-  
ably.  
High-voltage battery temperature is too  
high or too low.  
Safety information  
▷
▷
Selector lever position S is engaged.  
During manual gear-shifting using the shift  
paddles.  
Warning  
▷
For system-related demand from hybrid  
components.  
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians  
and other road users might pay less attention  
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Automatic switching-off of the  
combustion engine while driving  
Depending on the driving situation, the com-  
bustion engine is shut off if the requirements  
for electric drive are met.  
121  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
electric motor. To do so, press the accelerator  
pedal firmly.  
Energy recovery  
Principle  
With energy recovery, also called recuperation,  
the electric motor acts as an alternator and  
converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec-  
trical energy when braking and coasting.  
Boost Control function  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Boost  
Control function can be used for upcoming ac-  
celeration, for example.  
This recovered energy charges the high-volt-  
age battery. If necessary, this stored electrical  
energy is output to the electric motor.  
The system may provide additional drive  
power for a limited time.  
General information  
Depending on the M Setup menu settings:  
The high-voltage battery is charged at differ-  
ent speeds, and the vehicle is decelerated at  
different forces while coasting.  
General information  
The Boost Control function is operated using  
the shift paddles on the steering wheel.  
Setting Description  
Overview  
"MIN"  
"MID"  
Setting for low energy recovery.  
Setting for medium energy recov-  
ery.  
"MAX" Setting for maximum energy recov-  
ery.  
Energy recovery settings can be configured in  
the M Setup menu. Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
The shift paddles for Boost Control are located  
on the steering wheel.  
Functional requirements  
Conditions such as the following prerequisites  
must be met to recover kinetic energy:  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is moving.  
Selector lever position D/S is set.  
The high-voltage battery is not fully  
charged.  
Support from the electric motor  
During normal driving, the electric motor as-  
sists the combustion engine, depending on the  
situation.  
Accelerating quickly such as when passing re-  
quires the maximum available power from the  
122  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
M Steptronic Sport  
transmission  
General information  
The M Steptronic Sport transmission is oper-  
ated via the selector lever or the two shift pad-  
dles on the steering wheel.  
The following functions are available:  
▷
Various driving programs: Drive mode or  
sequential mode.  
▷
▷
Arrow 1: Function has been activated.  
Arrow 2: Function is available as long as  
the bar with BOOST appears.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Low Speed Assistant.  
Various Drivelogic programs.  
Launch Control.  
▷
Arrow 3: Function is being used for maxi-  
mum acceleration.  
Upshifting display, Shift lights.  
Using the function  
1. Pull and hold the left shift paddle until  
BOOST is displayed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
The function is active.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
A countdown is displayed as a bar in the  
instrument cluster.  
2. Before the countdown has finished, de-  
press the accelerator pedal.  
▷
BOOST is displayed on the instrument  
cluster.  
Selector lever positions  
Stopping and restarting the function  
D is Drive mode  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel are activated automatically.  
The function is automatically interrupted if the  
countdown has finished or if the function was  
used in the acceleration process. Once this  
function has been stopped, it can only be re-  
started after waiting 30 seconds.  
S is Sequential mode  
Selector lever position for driving. All gears for  
forward travel must be shifted manually.  
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left  
shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.  
R is reverse  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Deactivating the function  
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until this  
display goes out.  
123  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
N Neutral  
In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be  
pushed or roll without power, for instance, in  
car washes.  
Engaging selector lever position D/S,  
N, R  
P Park  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
wheels in selector lever position P.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
With the driver's seat belt fastened, pull or  
push the selector lever in the desired direction,  
past the resistance point as necessary. The  
selector lever automatically returns to the cen-  
ter position when released.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
▷
▷
▷
After the drive-ready state or standby state  
is switched off and selector lever position  
D/S or R is engaged.  
After the standby state has been switched  
off when selector lever position N is en-  
gaged.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driv-  
er's door is opened, and the brake pedal is  
not pressed while the vehicle is stationary  
and the selector lever is set to D/S or R.  
Engaging a selector lever position  
General information  
Press the button.  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
The parking brake is applied and the  
transmission lock is engaged.  
The engaged selector lever position is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster and on the  
selector lever.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,  
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and  
gear position D without pressing the brake.  
Functional requirements  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
124  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging selector lever position N  
Drive mode D/S  
Principle  
NOTICE  
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati-  
cally changed.  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of  
property damage. Do not switch off standby  
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car  
wash.  
Activating Drive mode  
Push the selector lever out of the center posi-  
tion in the D/S direction.  
Drive mode is activated. The engaged gear is  
displayed in the instrument cluster along with a  
D, e.g., 1 D.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 132.  
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.  
5. If necessary, open the door.  
Deactivating Drive mode  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode  
in the D/S direction. Sequential mode is acti-  
vated.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, e.g., 1.  
6. Depress the brake pedal.  
7. Engage selector lever position N.  
8. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Sequential mode D/S  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Principle  
In sequential mode, it is possible to shift gears  
manually using the selector lever or the shift  
paddles without letting off the gas.  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
General information  
Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent  
minimum speed, the transmission is automati-  
cally downshifted.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Once the maximum engine speed is attained,  
upshifting is not automatically performed in  
sequential mode and the kickdown is deacti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 128.  
It is also possible to drive off in 2nd gear;  
for instance, on icy roads.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum drive  
power in Drive mode.  
Activating sequential mode  
Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in  
the D/S direction.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
125  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Sequential mode is activated. The engaged  
Switching to Drive mode  
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g.,  
1.  
It is possible to switch to Drive mode as fol-  
lows: pull and hold the right shift paddle.  
Deactivating sequential mode  
Push the selector lever out of the center po-  
sition in the D/S direction. Drive mode is acti-  
vated.  
Switching via the shift paddles  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster along with a D, e.g., 1 D.  
Gear change  
Principle  
In sequential mode, gears can be shifted man-  
ually using the shift paddles.  
▷
▷
Upshift: pull right shift paddle.  
Downshift: pull left shift paddle.  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  
you to change gears quickly while keeping  
both hands on the steering wheel.  
Display on the selector lever  
The actually engaged transmission position  
can deviate from the selector lever position in  
some situations. The display in the selector  
lever flashes.  
General information  
Shifting  
Observe the display in the instrument cluster in  
these cases.  
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine  
and road speeds; for instance, downshifting is  
not possible if the engine speed is too high.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The lowest possible gear is selected by simul-  
taneously performing a kickdown and using  
the left shift paddle.  
Drive mode  
▷
▷
Engaged gear together with  
a D, arrow 1.  
Temporary sequential mode  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 2.  
After a shift paddle is actuated in Drive mode,  
the system temporarily switches to sequential  
mode.  
After conservative driving in sequential mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to Drive mode.  
Sequential mode  
▷
▷
▷
Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.  
Engaged gear, arrow 2.  
Selected Drivelogic program,  
arrow 3.  
Permanent sequential mode  
Sequential mode remains permanently active if  
it was active before the shift paddle was actu-  
ated.  
126  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Drive mode and the shifting times in sequential  
mode.  
Notice  
When the outside temperature is very low, the  
display may not work. Current driving direction  
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever  
position.  
General information  
Three Drivelogic programs are available.  
Whenever you switch between Sequential  
mode and Drive mode, the last program se-  
lected is enabled.  
Low Speed Assistant  
Principle  
If drive-ready state is switched on after the ve-  
hicle has been idle, DriveLogic program D1 is  
enabled in Drive mode.  
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at  
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking  
speed.  
Functional requirement  
The vehicle must be in one of the following  
hybrid modes:  
General information  
Use the Low Speed Assistant for maneuvering  
or in stop-and-go traffic.  
▷
▷
"HYBRID"  
The Low Speed Assistant can also be used  
for rocking the vehicle free in the snow. To do  
this, change over between reverse gear and  
forward gear without stepping on the brakes in  
the process.  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
"DYNAMIC"  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
"DYNAMIC PLUS"  
Drivelogic programs  
Activating  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
Program  
Drivelogic require-  
ments  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.  
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.  
4. Engage selector lever position D/S or R.  
5. Release brake.  
“COMFORT”  
Comfortable shifting  
operations.  
“SPORT”  
Sporty gear shifting.  
“SPORT PLUS”  
Performance-based  
gear shifting.  
In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle  
rolls at minimum speed.  
Selecting a DriveLogic program  
Deactivating  
Decelerate the vehicle to a stop.  
Via iDrive  
The desired DriveLogic program can be con-  
figured for buttons M1, M2, or M Setup.  
Drivelogic  
Principle  
Drivelogic changes the gear-shifting character-  
istics of the M Steptronic Sport transmission.  
For example, the shifting points are changed in  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
127  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
3. "Drivelogic"  
3. With your free hand, press and hold the se-  
lector lever in selector lever position N, until  
selector lever position N is displayed in the  
instrument cluster.  
4. Select the desired DriveLogic mode.  
The setting is immediately applied with ac-  
tive M1 or M2 configuration.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
To activate the desired configuration with the  
selected settings, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the steering wheel:  
4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector  
lever.  
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter  
stops.  
▷
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
▷
Additional information:  
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 377.  
Additional information:  
M Setup menu, refer to page 209.  
Launch Control  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The DriveLogic program se-  
lected corresponds to the num-  
ber of illuminated fields.  
Principle  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
General information  
The use of Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function represents  
a very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.  
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving  
off with Launch Control.  
Additional information:  
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank  
the engine.  
Break-in, refer to page 306.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the  
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-  
ing away.  
Functional requirements  
Launch Control is available when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter  
must audibly start. Press the Start/Stop  
button and hold.  
128  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions,  
when used again.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.  
▷
▷
Arrows 1: Function has been activated.  
Arrow 2: Function is being used for maxi-  
mum acceleration.  
Drive-off assistant  
Starting with launch control  
Principle  
On inclines, in selector lever position D, S, or  
R, this system prevents the vehicle from rolling  
opposite the set driving direction and provides  
drive-off support.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 214.  
Driving off  
Engage a gear position and step on the accel-  
erator pedal to drive off.  
3. With your left foot, forcefully press down on  
the brake.  
The parking brake is released automatically.  
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-  
tle position, kickdown.  
Depending on the vehicle load or driving situa-  
tion, the vehicle may roll back slightly.  
A specific display is activated on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
If necessary, activate Automatic Hold.  
Additional information:  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 132.  
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. With  
sufficiently high starting torque, the Launch  
Control is active.  
Parking brake  
Now release the brake. The vehicle acceler-  
ates.  
Principle  
Upshifting is performed automatically as  
long as the specific display is active and the  
accelerator pedal is not released.  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, it is  
necessary to drive a certain distance before  
129  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Overview  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Parking brake  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
Setting the parking brake  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
With a stationary vehicle  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Press the parking brake button.  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red.  
Warning  
The parking brake is engaged and  
transmission lock is engaged.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
While driving  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Press and hold the parking brake but-  
ton. The vehicle brakes hard for as long  
as the parking brake button is pressed.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-  
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-  
ary.  
130  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging the parking brake  
automatically  
In some situations, the parking brake is en-  
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic  
Hold.  
Using the parking brake via iDrive  
The parking brake can be engaged or disen-  
gaged via iDrive. Additionally, further informa-  
tion is displayed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-  
matically engaging the parking brake when the  
drive-ready state is turned off.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "Parking brake"  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
In selector lever position N, the parking brake  
will not be engaged automatically.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
Releasing the parking brake  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
2.  
Push the parking brake button while  
pressing the brake pedal.  
1. Turn on standby state.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
The transmission lock remains engaged  
until a gear position is selected.  
2.  
3.  
Press the parking brake button.  
Press the parking brake button  
again after 2 seconds.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
The Check Control messages for the park-  
ing brake go out.  
Possible function-related noises are nor-  
mal.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The indicator light indicates that the  
parking brake is ready for operation  
again.  
131  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Automatic Hold  
Principle  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-  
matically applying and releasing the brake,  
e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-  
and-go traffic.  
Warning  
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle  
is automatically held in place when it is station-  
ary.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
General information  
The parking brake is automatically engaged  
under the following conditions:  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
The driver’s door is open for more than one  
second and no pedal is pressed during this  
time.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-  
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the  
vehicle.  
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated.  
Safety information  
Overview  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
Automatic Hold  
132  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Activating Automatic Hold  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
2.  
Press the button.  
The indicator light goes out.  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
Automatic Hold is deactivated.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press the brake pedal when deactivating.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
M Hybrid  
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-  
ically secured against rolling away as  
soon as the indicator light illuminates  
green.  
Principle  
The behavior of the hybrid system can be ad-  
justed.  
General information  
Different settings for the hybrid system are  
provided.  
Automatic parking brake application  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
Mode  
Behavior of hybrid system  
"HYBRID"  
The vehicle is moved in hy-  
brid mode, i.e., it is driven by  
a combination of combustion  
engine and electric motor.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
"ELECTRIC"  
The vehicle is driven electri-  
cally.  
The combustion engine is  
only started in certain situa-  
tions, e.g., kickdown.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving  
off, depending on the load.  
Use the parking brake as needed to prevent  
the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.  
133  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Mode  
Behavior of hybrid system  
Driving on a racetrack, refer to page 310.  
"eCONTROL" Hybrid mode to prepare the  
vehicle for maximum per-  
formance, e.g., for driving on  
a racetrack.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
With hybrid drive, the vehicle  
is driven with reduced overall  
power. The temperature of  
the combustion engine and  
high-voltage battery as well  
as the high-voltage battery  
charge are adjusted for high-  
performance driving. A bar in  
the M Hybrid menu shows  
the progress. A longer driving  
distance may be necessary.  
The bar also shows the po-  
tential power of the drive for  
other drive settings.  
M HYBRID  
The combustion engine is not  
shut off in this mode.  
Selecting a mode  
Using the button  
"DYNAMIC"  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment: Hybrid mode for driv-  
ing on a race track.  
Press the button and select the desired  
mode on the control display.  
The vehicle is driven in hybrid  
mode.  
Via M1/M2  
The desired mode can be configured for the M1  
or M2 button on the steering wheel.  
This mode is designed for  
driving several laps with bal-  
anced system performance.  
Additional information:  
The combustion engine is not  
shut off in this mode.  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
"DYNAMIC  
PLUS"  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment: Hybrid mode for driv-  
ing on a race track.  
Drive system  
The vehicle is driven in hybrid  
drive.  
Principle  
The drive’s response to movement of the ac-  
celerator pedal can be adjusted. The intensity  
of the drive acoustics changes depending on  
the program.  
This mode is designed for  
short drives with full system  
performance.  
The combustion engine is not  
shut off in this mode.  
134  
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Button in the vehicle  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
Sound control  
Principle  
Sound Control changes the sound characteris-  
tics of the exhaust system.  
SETUP  
General information  
When Sound Control is turned on, the exhaust  
system sounds sporty and emotive.  
Programs  
Program  
Response characteristics  
When sound control is switched off, the sound  
is focused on comfort.  
"COMFORT"  
"SPORT"  
Comfortable.  
The sound characteristics are changed during  
the engine warm-up phase.  
Sporty, dynamic.  
"SPORT  
PLUS"  
Spontaneous, direct. Maxi-  
mum dynamics.  
Additional information:  
High-performance drive, refer to page 304.  
When Sound Control is on, the SPORT and  
SPORT PLUS programs change the intensity  
of the drive acoustics.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
Via iDrive  
The Sound Control settings can be configured  
in M Setup.  
Additional information: Sound Control, refer to  
page 135.  
Selecting a program  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Via iDrive  
Drive settings can be configured in M Setup.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
135  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
M MODE, refer to page 211.  
Vehicle features and options  
Safety information  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Overview  
General information  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
The view on the instrument cluster can vary  
depending on the selected driving mode. The  
driving mode is set using the M MODE button.  
The following M MODE views are available:  
▷
▷
▷
"ROAD": standard view of the instrument  
cluster for comfort-oriented driving. All dis-  
plays for driver assistance systems and col-  
lision warning systems are enabled.  
Instrument cluster  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
The contents of the instrument cluster are  
shown using the standard view as an example.  
This view is displayed in the following driving  
mode:  
"SPORT": M View to assist a sporty driv-  
ing style. The displays for driver assistance  
systems and collision warning systems are  
reduced to a minimum.  
Depending on the equipment:  
"TRACK": M View for driving on a race  
track. The driver assistance and collision  
warning system displays are deactivated.  
"ROAD"  
Additional information:  
136  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Operating Function  
element  
Display the menu bar on the in-  
strument cluster.  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-  
tion up or down.  
1
Speedometer  
2
Driver assistance systems 220  
Parking assistance systems 246  
Digital speedometer 146  
Shift lights 150  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
3
4
5
6
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Driver Attention Camera 207  
M Steptronic Sport transmission: gear dis-  
play with Drivelogic 127  
Settings  
Gear shift indicator 148  
Electric motor power gauge 148  
Tachometer 148  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
7
1.  
Apps menu  
8
9
Outside temperature 150  
Electric range 149  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
10 State of charge indicator 149  
11 Driving stability control systems 209  
12 Central display range 151  
Check Control 140  
4. "Instrument cluster"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Live Vehicle  
Selection lists 147  
13 Speed Limit Info 220  
Speed Limit Assistant 242  
14 Fuel gauge 155  
Principle  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle  
status or current driving condition.  
15 Range 149  
16 Time 154  
General information  
Additional information:  
Corresponding information is shown on the  
control display depending on the driving situa-  
tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Adaptive content or various static content can  
be selected.  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 140.  
137  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 384.  
Adaptive content  
The following content is displayed in alternat-  
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the  
selected drive mode:  
Overview  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 156.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 156.  
Sport displays, refer to page 156.  
Trip data, refer to page 152.  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or  
various static content for the display can be  
selected on the left-hand side bar:  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display depending on the driving  
mode selected:  
BMW Head-up display  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
Principle  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Shift lights.  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the  
driver's field of view. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away from  
the road.  
Tachometer.  
Power gauge.  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. More settings can be configured on the  
control display, e.g., brightness, height, or rota-  
tion.  
Selector lever display.  
Lists and messages.  
Driver assistance systems.  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
General information  
The views on the Head-up display adjust au-  
tomatically depending on the selected driving  
mode.  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
Additional information:  
138  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Configuring a view  
The views for the Head-up display can be set  
independently of the display on the instrument  
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.  
Setting the view  
Additional settings can be applied depending  
on the driving mode selected and the Head-up  
display configuration.  
1. "MENU"  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
3. "Displays"  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
Settings  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Various settings can be configured for the  
Head-up display, e.g., height, brightness, or  
rotation. In addition, individual displays in the  
Head-up display can be set up separately such  
as for Driver Assistance.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
3. "Displays"  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
139  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
3. "Vehicle status"  
Check Control  
4. "Check Control"  
5. Select the desired text message.  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display.  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
Indicator lights and warning  
lights  
To hide Check Control messages, tilt  
the knurled wheel on the steering  
wheel to the left.  
Principle  
The indicator lights and the warning lights on  
the instrument cluster show the status of some  
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights  
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored  
systems.  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
General information  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
140  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
System fault  
Contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or re-  
pair shop.  
Red lights  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
Seat belt reminder  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 198.  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 106.  
Risk of collision  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates or flashes in  
conjunction with an acoustic signal if  
there is risk of imminent collision.  
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Additional information:  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
Pedestrian Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian  
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 170.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-  
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-  
ing or an evasive maneuver.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 181.  
Parking brake, refer to page 129.  
Brake system  
Forward Collision Warning  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for braking.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
141  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 178.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal  
sounds:  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the right  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-  
minent. The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the  
system will not execute any supporting steer-  
ing movements.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 182.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the left  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment  
and national-market version, the driver's line of  
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.  
System interruption is imminent.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
Additional information:  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 182.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with  
your hands and pay attention to the surround-  
ing traffic.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Yellow lights  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
142  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
The ability to steer may be restricted during full  
braking.  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 214.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated  
The Dynamic Stability Control is deac-  
tivated or the M Dynamic Mode is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 209.  
Additional information:  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 214.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds: A system interruption is  
imminent.  
▷
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 216.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Additional information:  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not  
on steering wheel  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 349.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Tire pressure monitor  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
▷
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
143  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Acoustic pedestrian protection has  
malfunctioned. Increased caution when  
maneuvering.  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 343.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to  
page 120.  
Steering system  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Charging capacity limited  
Additional information:  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Charge vehicle, refer to page 314.  
M xDrive  
Exhaust emissions  
M xDrive is malfunctioning.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately  
by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
The exhaust gas quality is declining,  
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is  
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle  
checked as soon as possible.  
Additional information:  
M xDrive, refer to page 217.  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Green lights  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Turn signal  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Turn signal is on.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Additional information:  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Turn signal, refer to page 158.  
Parking lights  
Additional information:  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 366.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 161.  
144  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 132.  
Low-beam headlights  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Cruise Control  
Additional information:  
The system is active.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 161.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Low-beam headlights are switched on  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
Distance Control  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
High-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 159.  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Lane departure warning  
Speed Limit Assist  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Indicator light flashes: the system ac-  
tively issues a warning. If necessary, the sys-  
tem performs a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 242.  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 186.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Automatic Hold is activated  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-  
matically secures the vehicle to prevent  
it from rolling away.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 132.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Automatic Hold secures the stopped  
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,  
e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 236.  
Additional information:  
145  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change  
not possible  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 236.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
White lights  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 239.  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
Additional information:  
Blue lights  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
High-beam headlights  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system can be used.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 158.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 239.  
Gray lights  
Seat belt reminder  
Digital tachometer  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
General information  
The digital speedometer is permanently dis-  
played in all driving modes. The speed cur-  
rently driven is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Seat belts, refer to page 104.  
Distance Control  
Adjusting the unit  
Depending on the national-market version, it  
may be possible to set the unit for the digital  
tachometer.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-  
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-  
tor pedal.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Additional information:  
146  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
Display  
5. "Distance"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Selection lists  
Principle  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Example: selecting a radio station  
Current audio source.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
button.  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
2.  
To switch to the list of radio sta-  
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
Operating Function  
elements  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Pressing the button again will  
close the currently displayed list.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
button.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
turn the knurled wheel.  
Turn the knurled wheel: display  
the list for currently selected en-  
tertainment source or scroll up  
or down in the list.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move selec-  
tion to left or right.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
147  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Arrow 2: range for electric driving.  
Gear shift indicator  
The electric driving range is variable and may  
change depending on the driving situation.  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
Reduced drive power  
The available power may be reduced due to  
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-  
cally adjusted accordingly.  
General information  
In addition, the icons in the power gauge indi-  
cate a reduced drive power.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the gear shift indicator is ac-  
tive in sequential mode of the M Steptronic  
Sport transmission. Suggestions for consump-  
tion-optimized shifting are displayed.  
Icon  
Description  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
White icon: increased drive sys-  
tem temperature, for instance  
due to sustained or high  
power demand when driving  
on mountain roads.  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
Shift up to the most fuel efficient  
gear.  
System-related functional limi-  
tation.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where ap-  
plicable.  
Power gauge for electric  
motor  
Tachometer  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the current electric  
drive power as a percentage.  
General information  
The engine has a permissible rotational speed  
range. Excessive speeds are indicated by a  
yellow prewarning field and a red warning field.  
The permissible speed increases as the engine  
oil temperature increases.  
Display  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
Display  
The tachometer display changes depending  
on the selected driving mode.  
Arrow 1: display for energy recovery, e.g., dur-  
ing deceleration.  
148  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The following factors, for example, are taken  
into account when calculating the range:  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-  
matically adjusted depending on the available  
rotational speed range.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatic climate control settings.  
Driving style.  
Climate conditions.  
Vehicle load.  
Icon Description  
The total range is the electric range together  
with the combustion engine range.  
Power is reduced while the vehicle is  
broken in.  
Additional information:  
Fuel gauge and total range, refer to page 155.  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Safety information  
Warning  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Even when it is indicated that the high-volt-  
age battery is discharged, the high-voltage  
system is always still under high voltage.  
There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do  
not touch or change live parts, e.g., orange  
high-voltage cables, even when the batteries  
are discharged.  
When the drive-ready state  
is switched on, READY is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
If necessary, the combustion en-  
gine starts automatically.  
Display  
The display indicates that the  
high-voltage battery is almost  
fully discharged or the electric  
drive is currently not available.  
Additional information:  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 44.  
Charge state indicator and  
electric range  
If this icon is displayed, the  
electric drive is not available be-  
cause the high-voltage battery is  
too cold or too warm. A Check  
Control message is displayed  
where applicable.  
Principle  
The charge state indicator provides informa-  
tion about the battery charge and electric  
range on the instrument cluster.  
General information  
Various factors are taken into account when  
calculating the electric range. The electric  
range value is adapted dynamically.  
149  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The function is not available for the first 10 sec-  
onds after locking.  
Outside temperature  
Additional information:  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
Charge vehicle, refer to page 314.  
Overview  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,  
the temperature displayed may differ slightly  
from the actual outside temperature due to ex-  
ternal environmental influences.  
Safety information  
Warning  
1
Current state of charge 322  
Current range 322  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
2
3
4
Current charging capacity 322  
Range when reaching the charging desti-  
nation 322  
5
6
7
Set departure time 323  
Departure air conditioning 324  
Charge target set 322  
Charging screen  
8
Set or maximum current limit 314  
Principle  
Shift lights  
The charging screen displays information  
about the charging process in the instrument  
cluster.  
Principle  
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at  
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.  
General information  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
General information  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate  
the upcoming shift point.  
When the vehicle is locked, the most important  
information is displayed for a short period of  
time.  
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the latest.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes and the fuel  
supply is interrupted in order to protect the en-  
gine.  
Display charging screen again:  
With the charging cable plugged in,  
press the button on the vehicle key.  
150  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
If the vehicle is equipped with an M Steptronic  
Sport transmission, sequential mode must be  
selected to display the shift lights.  
Central display range  
Displayable content  
The following settings are available depending  
on the driving mode selected:  
Shift lights in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.  
Trip data, refer to page 152.  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
Navigation system route preview.  
Navigation system map view.  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Information on the systems configured us-  
ing the SETUP button.  
▷
▷
Drive data.  
Tire data.  
The Shift lights are shown on the instrument  
cluster in the following situations:  
The Head-up display is deactivated or the fol-  
lowing drive mode is activated: "ROAD".  
Information on wheels and tires can be dis-  
played.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Sport displays, refer to page 156.  
G-Meter, refer to page 154.  
Entertainment.  
Shift lights in the Head-up display  
Augmented View.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-  
mented View on the instrument cluster en-  
ables the visualization of driver assistance  
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-  
ings.  
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-  
imum distance to the preceding vehicle  
when speed control systems are deacti-  
vated.  
The shift lights, arrow 1, are displayed above  
the tachometer, arrow 2.  
The shift lights are shown on the Head-up dis-  
play in the following driving modes:  
▷
Android Auto©.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
▷
▷
"SPORT"  
Depending on vehicle equipment: "TRACK"  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
Additional information:  
Head-up display, refer to page 138.  
151  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Average fuel consumption depending  
on the configured interval.  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Average electrical consumption de-  
pending on the configured interval.  
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
Odometer for driving without a com-  
bustion engine.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Displaying trip data continuously  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "CONTENT"  
2. "Vehicle"  
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel where applicable.  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. "Trip data"  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on consumption and distance cov-  
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Trip data  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption  
or trip distance.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, electric, arrow 1.  
Current consumption, fuel, arrow 2.  
Average consumption, fuel, arrow 3.  
Average consumption, electric, arrow 4.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Display on the control display  
Distance traveled depending on the interval  
set, arrow 5.  
General information  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
▷
Total distance, arrow 6.  
152  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel:  
1. Display trip data in the instrument cluster.  
Current consumption  
The current consumption display allows you  
to check the current energy consumption and  
the current fuel consumption, e.g., to drive effi-  
ciently.  
2. Press and hold the  
knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
Average consumption  
Via iDrive:  
The average power consumption and the  
average fuel consumption are displayed de-  
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip  
data are configured.  
1. Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Reset Individual"  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
"Since Individual ( )"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Values"  
Assisted View  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Principle  
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
With Assisted View, information on driver as-  
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-  
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.  
▷
"Since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with a  
larger quantity of fuel.  
Assisted View is available in the following driv-  
ing mode:  
"ROAD"  
▷
▷
"Since last charge": the values are auto-  
matically reset after charging.  
If the parking assistance system is on, parking  
and maneuvering information is shown in As-  
sisted View for all driving modes.  
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
Safety information  
▷
"Since Individual": the values since the  
last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time:  
"Since Individual ( )"  
153  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
G-Meter  
General information  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
General  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-  
played on the central display range.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
Display  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
An example with active Driver Assistance: the  
indicator and warning lights for the distance  
control and the Lane Change Assistant indi-  
cate a lane change to the next lane. At the  
same time, the lane change to the next lane is  
shown with animation in the Assisted View.  
Date and time  
Various settings can be applied for the date  
and time display such as the date format.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set or  
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic  
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,  
the time zone are updated automatically.  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Additional information:  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 39.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 40.  
154  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
Fuel gauge and total range  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Principle  
The fuel gauge shows information on the cur-  
rent fuel tank fill level and the total range on  
the instrument cluster.  
Overall range  
The total range considers the contents of the  
fuel tank as well as the electric energy in the  
high-voltage battery. If the prerequisites for  
electric driving are not met, the total range  
considers the content of the fuel tank only.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 327.  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel  
promptly.  
Additional information:  
Battery charge indicator and electric range, re-  
fer to page 149  
Display  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Current total range, arrow 1.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Units"  
Current fill level of fuel tank, arrow 2.  
Arrow icon for the vehicle side on which the  
fuel filler flap is located, arrow 3.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
155  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
The following states can be displayed:  
Vehicle status  
▷
▷
Driving.  
Electric driving.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems such as for Check  
Control.  
Additional information on electric driving is  
displayed depending on the situation.  
▷
"CHARGING BATTERY"  
Functional requirements  
Displaying vehicle status  
▷
The following driving mode is selected:  
1.  
Apps menu  
"ROAD"  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-  
ting: "Adaptive content".  
3. "Vehicle status"  
Overview  
Display  
Icon  
Description  
"Battery temperature": Tem-  
perature of high-voltage bat-  
tery, refer to page 314.  
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-  
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 349.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 343.  
An example:  
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-  
cle decelerates.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 360.  
Sport displays  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 140.  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
"Service": display of the service  
notifications, refer to page 157.  
Functional requirements  
Current driving condition  
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.  
▷
The following setting is selected for Live  
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"  
General information  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
156  
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
Indicators on control display  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
5. Select the desired entry.  
The following information is displayed:  
Entering appointment dates  
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can  
be entered.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.  
Power.  
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Sport displays can be shown in the central dis-  
play area of the instrument cluster. Sport dis-  
plays include information on power and torque.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Additional information:  
5. "Vehicle inspection"  
6. "Date:"  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
157  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "One-touch turn signal"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates when the high-beam  
headlights are turned on.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
158  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
lights.  
Principle  
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
continuing the journey.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
General information  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.  
Functional requirements  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.  
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Additional settings"  
5. "Automatic High Beams"  
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1,  
or pull the turn signal lever backward when  
the high-beam headlights are switched on, ar-  
row 2.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the  
turn signal lever is not possible.  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
159  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Exterior lighting  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
160  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Function  
Driving lights automatic  
Exterior lighting menu.  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Exterior lighting off.  
Exterior lighting off.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
Functions via iDrive  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic headlight control.  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Parking lights.  
The icon in the button illuminates green.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Exterior lighting off.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Right roadside parking light.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
Icon  
Function  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
General information  
Pathway lighting.  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
161  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
Parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
Turning on parking lights  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. "Parking light"  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the  
low speed range:  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
▷
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
Turn off light via iDrive.  
Turning off parking lights  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press and hold the button on the  
light switch.  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
Turn off light via iDrive.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
Turn on drive-ready state.  
4. "Left roadside parking light" or "Right  
roadside parking light"  
After the drive-ready state is switched on,  
the automatic headlight control will be acti-  
vated.  
162  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Welcome Light Carpet  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
The light source is located in the position indi-  
cated.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Pathway lighting  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
Principle  
5. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
▷
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
The radiator grille lighting can only be  
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary  
and the drive-ready state is switched  
off.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
Turning on the welcome light  
Setting the duration  
▷
Automatically on approach.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
During unlocking.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
with the vehicle locked.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "Pathway lighting"  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
163  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Daytime driving lights  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Cornering light  
Principle  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version:  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
"BMW Iconic Glow"  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
Adaptive lighting functions  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
Instrument lighting  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Functional requirement  
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-  
ness and with turned on parking lights or low-  
beam headlights.  
▷
Cornering light.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button on the light switch.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
164  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
Interior lighting  
5.  
Tap on the icon.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
Turning reading lights on/off  
Using the button:  
Press the button.  
Overview  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
5. Tap the desired seat.  
Interior lighting menu  
Reading lights  
The brightness of the reading lights can be  
adjusted when they are turned on.  
Changing settings  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the bright-  
ness can be individually adjusted for specific  
seats.  
Interior lights  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning interior lights on/off  
Using the button:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. "Reading light"  
Press the button.  
5. Tap the desired seat.  
6. Select the desired settings.  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
165  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
5. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Ambient light  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Dynamic light  
Certain situations, for example incoming calls  
or obstacles detected when opening doors, are  
indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is  
disabled, the light effects are still displayed.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Interior lighting"  
2. "Vehicle"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Lighting effects"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Ambient lighting"  
Reduced for night drive  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
1.  
Apps menu  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Reduced for night driving"  
Selecting the color  
The color of the ambient light can only be se-  
lected in ROAD drive mode.  
Speaker lighting  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Color"  
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.  
Turning speaker lighting on/off  
The speaker lighting is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
166  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor mode, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
The wiper speed can be reduced gradually to  
protect the wiper motor from overheating.  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-  
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the  
window is dry.  
NOTICE  
Press the lever down or forward.  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
▷
Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,  
until it reaches the 0 position.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the  
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in  
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.  
The lever returns to its initial position when  
released.  
Turning on window wiper system  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
167  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
Activating rain sensor  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the window washer  
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.  
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-  
row 1.  
Wiping operation is started.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of property damage. Do not  
use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press lever back into the 0 position.  
168  
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward and  
hold it until the wipers stop in an approxi-  
mately vertical position.  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-  
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when  
the wiper moves upward.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Turn on standby state, then press the wiper  
lever down or forward again and hold it.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost  
169  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
170  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
Knee airbag  
The availability of the knee airbag depends on  
the national-market version.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel  
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
171  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Malfunction  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Safety information  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 101.  
Automatic deactivation of  
front passenger airbag  
Principle  
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-  
vation can detect if the front passenger seat is  
occupied.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The front passenger airbag is activated or de-  
activated accordingly.  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
172  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag  
The front passenger airbag indicator light in  
the headliner indicates the operating state of  
the front passenger airbag.  
Functional requirements  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
The light indicates whether the airbag is acti-  
vated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
illuminates briefly and then indicates whether  
the airbag is activated or deactivated.  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
Display  
Function  
▷
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
The indicator light is contin-  
uously illuminated when the  
seat is not occupied or when a  
child is detected on the seat in  
a provided child restraint sys-  
tem as intended. The airbag  
on the front passenger's side  
is not activated.  
Sit upright in the seat with your back  
against the backrest.  
Sit down with your feet touching the floor.  
Installing child restraint systems  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface of the front passenger seat:  
The indicator light does not il-  
luminate when, for instance, a  
correctly seated person of suf-  
ficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbag on the front  
passenger's side is activated.  
▷
Pay attention to the specifications and the  
operating and safety information of the  
child restraint system manufacturer when  
using child restraint systems.  
▷
▷
Make sure that the seat surface of the child  
restraint system rests as flat as possible on  
the seat surface.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied,  
check the indicator light in the headliner before  
and while driving.  
Move the head restraint up or remove it to  
ensure that the child restraint system rests  
as flat as possible against the rear seat  
backrest.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-  
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat  
positions. In this case, the indicator light for  
the front passenger airbag illuminates in the  
headliner.  
▷
Observe the maximum size of the child re-  
straint system, for example to avoid possi-  
ble touching the roof.  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbag activates and the  
indicator light goes out.  
More information: installation of child restraint  
systems, refer to page 115.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
173  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Occupancy detection  
The occupant detection system satisfies the  
legal requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates  
the front passenger airbag under certain con-  
ditions.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Collision warning systems  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has  
different systems that can help prevent the risk  
of imminent collision.  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 175.  
Sensors  
▷
▷
▷
Exit warning, refer to page 184.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 186.  
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 189.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 192.  
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 194.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to  
page 194.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Wrong way warning, refer to page 196.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
No Turn on Red function, refer to page 197.  
Turning on/turning off collision  
warning systems  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 198.  
Depending on national-market version, some  
of the systems are automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
Safety information  
The following functions are adjustable.  
Warning  
M MODE: The warning time setting cannot be  
changed in SPORT and TRACK driving mode.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
174  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
M MODE: the various driving modes affect the  
availability of the collision warning systems.  
Some collision warning systems are deacti-  
vated depending on the driving mode selected.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
M Mode, refer to page 211  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help  
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be  
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-  
verity of the accident.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Reset to recommended settings"  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed.  
System limits  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the  
following functions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-  
tions, refer to page 178.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer  
to page 179.  
Warning function for turning with oncoming  
traffic, refer to page 180.  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 181.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 182.  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 183.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
175  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below these values again.  
Turning the Forward Collision  
Mitigation on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Turning on system manually  
Warning  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 176.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on national-market version, the ad-  
justment can only be made when the vehicle is  
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.  
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed  
successively on the control display.  
Sensors  
1.  
Apps menu  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. "Off"  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Setting the warning time  
Speed range  
The system issues a warning of a possi-  
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
176  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
The system checks for visual impairments. De-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster  
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility  
and field of vision also affect the timing of the  
warnings.  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Red warning light flashes:  
The following indicator lights and warning  
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,  
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-  
up display:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Risk of collision, for instance with an  
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
Automatic brake intervention  
General risk of collision.  
In case of a risk of collision, the system can  
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if  
necessary.  
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-  
ing lights may display differently if the system  
detects multiple objects.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic  
Stability Control activates automatically.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
177  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
Depending on the equipment and situation,  
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
System limits  
Warning function in forward  
collision situations  
Safety information  
Warning  
Principle  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
The warning function in forward collision situa-  
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and  
may brake independently.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General information  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
178  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Warning function for  
oncoming traffic  
Principle  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The warning function for oncoming traffic can  
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-  
ing vehicles and may brake independently.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
General information  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
or only detected with a delay, for instance:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
General risk of collision.  
179  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning function  
General information  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake  
intervention is triggered.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds  
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of  
warnings may vary with the current driving sit-  
uation.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Warning function for turning  
with oncoming traffic  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Principle  
There is a risk of an accident with oncom-  
ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-  
ing lane. The system can issue a warning of  
a possible risk of collision and activate the  
brakes independently, if needed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-  
hicle is detected.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
180  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when turning.  
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Upper speed limit  
The system is active when the own speed is  
below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Warning function for  
pedestrians  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-  
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.  
Principle  
Icon  
Meaning  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists. The system may brake automatically.  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
General information  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range when on a straight line.  
181  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection range  
General information  
The detection range consists of the following  
parts:  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-  
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.  
With side radar sensors in front: side areas,  
arrows 2.  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-  
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-  
fic is detected.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-  
rent driving situation.  
Upper speed limit  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Warning function at  
intersections  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the right.  
Principle  
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-  
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function  
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-  
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and  
junctions. The system may brake automati-  
cally.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
182  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning function  
General information  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 175.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes  
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-  
neuver is possible.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in  
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle  
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are  
also monitored.  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-  
form an evasive maneuver safely.  
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-  
tions.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Functional requirements  
Evasion Assistant  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
▷
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
vehicle.  
Principle  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly.  
Speed range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,  
a warning light is displayed.  
183  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Meaning  
▷
▷
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Icon  
Warning when a vehicle is detected.  
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.  
Exit warning  
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-  
cle.  
Principle  
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.  
The system can warn the occupants when  
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-  
sion with approaching objects is detected.  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, a warning is displayed  
if there is an immediate risk of collision.  
General information  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
The system is designed to provide assistance  
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk  
of collision.  
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-  
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-  
play signals the evasion support.  
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor  
the area behind the vehicle.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-  
sors are located in the front bumper.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-  
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-  
ous warning functions.  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
184  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Displays  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Turning the exit warning on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
The exit warning activates automatically after  
departure if the function was switched on at  
the completion of the last trip.  
Turning system off manually  
1.  
Apps menu  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
Ambient light  
Depending on the equipment, warnings are  
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-  
rior.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Warning function  
Adjusting the exit warning  
Prewarning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-  
pending on the equipment, the ambient light  
also flashes.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
An object was detected in the opening area.  
Increased awareness is required.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Acute warning  
Turning the warning signal on/off  
In the event of an acute warning, the warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does  
the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Exit warning"  
There is a risk of collision when opening the  
doors.  
7. "Warning tone"  
185  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.  
Stationary or very slow objects.  
Pedestrians.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
The system issues a warning starting at a min-  
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed on the control display.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Various warning functions from this system  
help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.  
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too  
fast or too slow.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
▷
▷
In curves.  
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.  
Safety information  
Lane Departure Warning  
with active return  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering  
wheel in response to a warning.  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
186  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Off"  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
Configuring the warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
▷
"Expanded"  
If the system detects that your vehicle  
is about to leave your lane or cross a  
lane marking, a warning is issued. The  
system performs a steering intervention.  
Radar sensor, side, front.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
▷
"In dangerous situations"  
Broken road lines: If the system detects  
that the vehicle is about to inadvertently  
cross a lane marking, or if the sensors  
detect an oncoming vehicle, a warning  
is issued and a steering intervention is  
performed.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by the selected warn-  
ing setting.  
Depending on national-market version,  
with continuous lane markings: If the  
system detects that your vehicle is  
about to inadvertently leave your lane  
or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-  
sued and a steering intervention is per-  
formed.  
Additional information:  
Configuring the warning, refer to page 187.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
the switch-off on the control display.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
187  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
Warning function  
7. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-  
parture Warning system, depending on situa-  
tion and speed:  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
▷
Indicator lights and warning lights on the  
instrument cluster.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
▷
▷
Vibration of steering wheel.  
Steering intervention.  
Warning tone.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
Steering wheel vibration  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
Additionally, a light is displayed on the instru-  
ment cluster.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the equipment and the national-  
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in  
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
system intervenes with a brief active steering  
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane. The steering intervention can  
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be  
manually overridden at any time.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is actively issuing a warning. If neces-  
sary, the system performs a steering  
intervention.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
During an active steering intervention, a light is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
188  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
System limits  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
End of warning  
Functional limitations  
For instance, the warning or an active steering  
intervention will be canceled in the following  
situations:  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.  
When the system limits are reached.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Warning signal  
A warning tone sounds if the driver does  
not actively steer after the Lane Departure  
Warning system has performed multiple active  
steering interventions within one minute.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
with active return  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
The warning tone and Check Control message  
advise the driver to pay closer attention to their  
lane.  
Principle  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
The longer warning tone is stopped if the  
driver takes control of the steering.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
189  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Functional requirement  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the system activates automati-  
cally whenever you start driving.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
The system will warn in the previously named  
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-  
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the  
steering wheel vibrates.  
Configuring the warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Sensors  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
190  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Steering intervention  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
Depending on the national-market version:  
when there is no response to the vibration  
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking  
is crossed, the system engages the active  
steering intervention. The steering intervention  
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
The steering intervention is carried out from  
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-  
played on the control display.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
System limits  
Prewarning  
General information  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
Acute warning  
When an acute warning occurs, the steering  
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the  
exterior mirror flashes brightly.  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
191  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Displaying warnings  
General information  
The number of warnings shown depends on  
how the settings are configured. However,  
there may also be an excess of unwarranted  
warnings of critical situations.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed on the control display.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-  
tions:  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next  
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-  
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a  
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-  
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating  
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering  
intervention is performed by the system.  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-  
vention to be active.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Side collision mitigation  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
192  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Turning the side collision warning  
on/off  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Side collision warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Acute warning  
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel starts vibrating.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision and  
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
System limits  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
193  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
▷
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
Sensors  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides and rear.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
System limits  
Principle  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
General information  
Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning  
Principle  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides  
support in situations in which the right-of-way  
needs to be yielded based on road signs or  
traffic lights.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
194  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic  
lights using a camera behind the windshield.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
The navigation system directs information on  
the road layout to the system.  
Turning the Traffic Light And Sign  
Warning on/off  
A warning is given if the right of way is about  
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-  
tions:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.  
3. "Driving settings"  
At a road entrance.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
On a highway entrance ramp.  
At a roundabout.  
With a red traffic light.  
The system issues a warning as from a vari-  
able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-  
prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
The following traffic signs are taken into ac-  
count for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Sign Meaning  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Give way signs:  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Stop signs:  
The selected setting is saved and adopted for  
the next journey.  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Warning function  
When traffic lights are red, a pre-  
warning and an acute warning will be  
issued.  
General information  
The system issues a two-phase warning:  
▷
▷
Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in  
the instrument cluster.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Acute warning: visual warning by an icon  
in the instrument cluster and an additional  
acoustic signal.  
Functional requirement  
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle  
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or  
light signal systems.  
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-  
tual driving situation and the warning time set-  
ting.  
195  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Prewarning  
No warning  
If there is a risk that a right of way is about to  
be violated, one of the following icons appears  
in the instrument cluster:  
The system does not issue a warning in the  
following situations, for example:  
▷
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-  
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal  
systems.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Give way.  
With intersections with relevant traffic lights  
that are illuminated yellow or green.  
Stop.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Red traffic light.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
Acute warning  
If there is an acute risk that the right of way  
is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will  
sound and one of the following icons will ap-  
pear in the instrument cluster:  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
Icon  
Meaning  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Red traffic light.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example, by  
braking.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Display in the Head-up display  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
warning is displayed simultaneously in the  
Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.  
In some regions, the system may not be  
available or only partially available.  
Wrong way warning  
System limits  
Principle  
The wrong way warning warns the driver of  
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
196  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-  
way streets.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-  
tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to  
check the traffic situation.  
No warning  
For example, the system does not issue a  
warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.  
For example, the system takes the following  
traffic signs into account:  
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.  
Functional limitations  
Roundabout.  
The function may be limited in the following  
situations, for instance, and will either output  
an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning  
at all:  
Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.  
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-  
cealed or soiled.  
Functional requirement  
The road layout ahead must be controlled  
clearly with traffic signs.  
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-  
tated.  
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.  
Sensors  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply  
to a junction or parallel street.  
Turning wrong way warning on/off  
Depending on national-market version, the  
wrong way warning is automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
Warning function  
A warning is displayed and a signal  
tone sounds, for example when the ve-  
hicle is traveling in the wrong direction  
on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.  
It may not be possible to use the system in  
all regions.  
No Turn on Red function  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the  
Head-up display.  
Principle  
This function provides assistance to the driver  
at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-  
ited.  
197  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights  
and traffic signs using the camera behind the  
windshield. In addition, the navigation system  
data is used.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-  
clear.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
difficult to read or rotated.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems are  
too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the  
standard.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-  
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and  
traffic signs.  
With intersections with flashing light signal  
systems.  
In the case of navigation data that is inva-  
lid, outdated or not available.  
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m  
from the traffic lights.  
In some regions, this function may not be  
completely available or not available at all.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning is turned on.  
Sensors  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
Principle  
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle  
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to  
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If the driver approaches a red traffic  
light with a traffic sign that prohibits  
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-  
played on the instrument cluster.  
General information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-  
tomatically.  
The indicator light goes out automatically after  
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.  
9 mph/15 km/h.  
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane keeping.  
System limits  
Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered in  
TRACK drive mode.  
General information  
Safety information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Warning  
Functional limitations  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
198  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
Activating/deactivating Emergency  
Stop Assistant  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Functional requirements  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Emergency stop"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated  
via iDrive.  
The system is activated from a speed of  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver  
activity.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-  
sistant by actively taking control of driving the  
vehicle throughout the entire process.  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the system detects that the driver is no  
longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores  
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is  
triggered automatically. The triggered system  
is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
The system is stopped by the following ac-  
tions, for example:  
▷
▷
By firmly pressing the accelerator pedal.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be  
triggered via voice input.  
By stopping the system on the control dis-  
play.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
By operating the turn signal.  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 57.  
By turning off the hazard warning system.  
By firmly countersteering.  
An immediate emergency call can be triggered  
on the control display.  
By changing the selector lever position  
when the vehicle was already at a stand-  
still.  
The following is performed automatically when  
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-  
tem will carry out the following settings:  
▷
▷
▷
In SPORT drive mode, the vehicle switches  
automatically to ROAD drive mode.  
A display is shown on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
The system takes over vehicle handling un-  
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Status  
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
199  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits  
The system cannot replace the roadworthy  
driving performance of a driver.  
Safety information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-  
stricted in the following situations:  
Warning  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
Cross Traffic Warning with  
Braking  
Principle  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake  
intervention to switch on automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by  
sensors.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
6. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
If there is a collision risk when reversing, the  
system will provide assistance by performing  
an automatic brake intervention.  
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
"Brake intervention at rear"  
200  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Visual warning  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system must be activated on the control  
display. The system turns on automatically as  
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera  
view activates and you engage a gear position.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
Depending on the equipment, the front system  
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system is automatically turned off in the  
following situations:  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
Warning function  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
In case of a brake intervention, a message is  
displayed on the control display and close after  
a brief period of time.  
Display in camera image  
Depending on the direction of travel, the view  
to the front or back is displayed in the camera  
image.  
201  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone  
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-  
spective direction.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.  
System limits  
The function makes it possible to document  
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the  
corresponding recording type set.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Manual storage of the recording.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
This function is used to document traffic sit-  
uations with the configured recording type.  
Functional limitations  
The function can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
The assistance systems' cameras are used to  
record, e.g., Panorama View.  
Additionally, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
Time.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
Vehicle speed.  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Data protection  
BMW Drive Recorder  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory  
regulations of the country in which the system  
is to be used. The user is responsible for the  
use of the system and compliance with respec-  
tive applicable regulations.  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state  
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,  
the laws with respect to use of the system  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
202  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-  
cially when borders are frequently crossed.  
Recording functions  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information  
about the system is required when handing off  
the vehicle.  
Automatic recording  
The recording is automatically stored when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.  
▷
In case of accident:  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
▷
In case of theft:  
Depending on the selected recording dura-  
tion, the system saves the recording after it  
has been triggered.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Recording type was selected.  
Recording time was selected.  
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-  
sage is sent to the My BMW App.  
Theft notification:  
After saving the recording, the reduced  
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-  
bile device.  
▷
The theft notification was activated in the  
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-  
corder menu.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
Manual recording  
▷
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Using the button  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated  
before the first use of the recording function.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Press and hold this button.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
Via iDrive  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Start the recording:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
203  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
4. "Recording"  
Recording on a mobile device  
5. "Start recording"  
Principle  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
Depending on the equipment version, video  
recordings can be stored directly on a mobile  
device such as a smartphone or USB storage.  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Stored video recordings can be played back,  
exported and deleted.  
General information  
Depending on national-market version: The  
storable video length depends on the mobile  
device's available storage space.  
For your own safety, the video recording is  
only displayed on the control display up to ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market  
versions, the video recording is only displayed  
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-  
tor lever is in the P position.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile  
device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi  
and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-  
vice is connected.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recordings"  
▷
▷
▷
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
5. Select desired recording.  
6. If necessary, select camera.  
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Settings  
The My BMW App is permitted to access  
your photo library.  
Recording type  
1.  
Apps menu  
Recording  
2. "All apps"  
The recording can be started and stopped  
manually.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
Start the recording:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Recording time  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
5. "Start recording"  
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
204  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system is used to detect certain critical  
driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
Cameras  
Different cameras can be selected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. "Cam. selection"  
6. Select desired camera.  
Certain functions of several systems can,  
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-  
tion triggering:  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic  
brake intervention.  
System limits  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not  
be possible to store recordings if the damage  
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply  
was interrupted.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.  
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of  
impending rear-end collisions.  
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may  
not be possible to export recordings correctly.  
Active Protection is not triggered in TRACK  
driving mode.  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
Safety information  
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-  
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system  
has been triggered.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be  
established, theft alerts and video downloads  
may be restricted or not available.  
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects  
whether recordings can be saved on your  
smartphone. This function may be restricted or  
not available if the connection is weak.  
Function  
Depending on the equipment and require-  
ments, the following individual functions are  
active in accident-critical driving situations:  
Active Protection  
Principle  
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
or collision situations.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
▷
▷
Automatic closing of glass sunroof.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
Automatic positioning of the backrest for  
the front passenger seat.  
205  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation with-  
out accident.  
Fatigue alert  
Principle  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-  
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued  
or less alert during long, monotonous trips,  
for instance on highways. This function recom-  
mends taking a break.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
Once a drive is started, this function is trained  
to the driver, enabling it to detect when the  
driver is less alert or is fatigued.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
Abort automatic braking:  
Depending on the equipment: attention  
of the driver through the Driver Attention  
Camera.  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
This function activates at speeds greater than  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display  
a break recommendation.  
206  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Driver Attention Camera  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Fatigue Alert"  
Principle  
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors  
the driver’s activity and, depending on the  
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
General information  
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-  
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,  
by evaluating their head position and eyes.  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
Display  
Functional requirements  
For full operability, make sure that the field of  
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-  
structed.  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The steering wheel and driver’s seat height  
must be adjusted so that the entire instrument  
cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Atten-  
tion Camera to record the driver’s entire face.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
Overview  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-  
ment cluster may have some infrared light  
sources. Depending on the light conditions,  
these light sources can be visible when the  
vehicle is in standby mode.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
207  
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
208  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
M Setup  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
The SETUP button is used to configure various  
driving dynamics and drive systems.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
General information  
When the drive-ready state is switched on after  
the idle state, an efficient vehicle condition is  
active by default.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each time drive-ready state is turned on.  
Overview  
Malfunction  
Button in the center console  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
SETUP  
209  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Icon  
System  
"M HYBRID": Hybrid modes of M Hy-  
brid, refer to page 133.  
Button Function  
M1 configuration.  
M Steptronic Sport transmission:  
"Transmission": Switching modes.  
M2 configuration.  
"DSC": Dynamic Stability Control, re-  
fer to page 214, and M Dynamic  
Mode, refer to page 216.  
Settings  
"M Sound": Sound Control, refer to  
page 135.  
Icon  
System  
"Drivetrain": Drive, refer to page 134,  
programs.  
Operation via SETUP  
"Energy recovery": Energy recovery  
modes, refer to page 121.  
General information  
The settings from the SETUP button are ap-  
plied directly. The settings are not saved.  
"Chassis": Programs of Adaptive  
M suspension, refer to page 275, and  
settings of Integral Active Steering,  
refer to page 218.  
Configuring M Setup  
1.  
Press the button.  
"Steering": programs of Servotronic,  
refer to page 213.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Operation via M1/M2  
General information  
The settings for the driving dynamics and drive  
systems can be configured for the M1/M2 but-  
tons and retrieved if required.  
"Drivelogic": Programs of the  
Drivelogic, refer to page 127.  
"Brake": programs of brake, refer to  
page 214.  
"M xDrive": programs of M xDrive, re-  
fer to page 217.  
With activated M1 or M2 configuration, any  
changes to the setting are immediately ap-  
plied.  
When M1/M2 is deactivated or reset, the driv-  
ing dynamics and drive systems are reset to  
their default settings.  
The following systems can also be configured  
for M1/M2:  
210  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Disabling M1/M2  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel.  
Warning  
Depending on the setting, Dynamic Stability  
Control may be restricted or not available  
when the M1 or M2 button is activated. There  
is a risk of accidents and risk of property  
damage. Note the settings for Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control in iDrive and take any necessary  
action. Modify your driving style and react, if  
necessary.  
Resetting M1/M2  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
3. "Reset"  
4. "Reset M1 settings."  
To cancel resetting: "Cancel"  
Configuring M1/M2  
Display in the instrument cluster  
1.  
Press the button.  
Icon  
Description  
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION"  
Icon illuminates: corresponding  
configuration is activated.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
The individual settings are stored for the con-  
figuration currently in use.  
Alternatively, current system settings can be  
directly saved to M1 or M2. To do this, press  
and hold the desired button on the steering  
wheel until an acoustic signal sounds.  
Icon illuminates and "Function  
cannot currently be activated."  
appears: Configuration cannot  
be activated due to current  
driving situation.  
Activating M1/M2  
Press the corresponding button on the steering  
wheel:  
Reactivate configuration when  
the lettering is not illuminated.  
▷
Activate M1.  
M MODE  
▷
Activate M2.  
Principle  
Driver assistance and collision warning sys-  
tems can be adapted to the situation via M  
MODE.  
"M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2  
CONFIGURATION": If DSC OFF or M Dynamic  
Mode is set, a message is displayed on the  
instrument cluster. This message is confirmed  
by pressing the button again.  
The display on the instrument cluster and  
the Head-up display view change with the se-  
lected drive mode.  
211  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Overview  
The following driving modes are available:  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
"ROAD"  
"SPORT"  
Depending on the equipment: "TRACK"  
The view on the instrument cluster changes  
depending on the selected drive mode.  
Safety information  
Warning  
M MODE  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
Driving modes  
ROAD drive mode  
▷
All available collision warning systems are  
switched on.  
Warning  
▷
All available driver assistance systems are  
active.  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
ROAD drive mode is activated after drive-  
ready state is switched on.  
SPORT drive mode  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
systems are deactivated:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane departure warning.  
Side collision mitigation.  
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
Steering Assistant.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
Lane Change Assistant.  
The vehicle automatically switches to ROAD  
driving mode when you activate certain sys-  
tems.  
212  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
TRACK driving mode  
In addition to the deactivated systems in  
SPORT drive mode, the following systems are  
deactivated, depending on vehicle equipment:  
Servotronic  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power  
steering function.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Speed Limit Info.  
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Active Blind Spot Detection.  
Traffic Light And Sign Warning.  
Rear-end collision preparation.  
Emergency Stop Assistant.  
Active Protection.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
Furthermore, the steering force adapts to the  
driving mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a  
comfortable steering response.  
Hazard flashing with hard braking right be-  
fore standstill is deactivated.  
▷
▷
Control display is switched off.  
Overview  
The functions of the entertainment system  
are switched off.  
Button in the vehicle  
Selecting the driving mode  
ROAD and SPORT drive modes can only be  
enabled when drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
TRACK drive mode can only be enabled when  
the vehicle is stationary or driving at a very low  
speed.  
SETUP  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
In addition, the collision warning systems can  
be adjusted.  
Programs  
Additional information:  
Program  
Steering force tuning  
Collision warning systems, refer to page 175.  
"COMFORT" Low steering forces, good  
roadway feedback.  
Display  
"SPORT"  
High steering forces, maxi-  
mum roadway feedback.  
The display changes according to the drive  
mode selected. The view can be configured  
individually.  
213  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Selecting a program  
Programs  
Program  
Response characteristics  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
"COMFORT" Comfortable.  
"SPORT" Direct.  
Via iDrive  
Servotronic settings can be configured in M  
Setup.  
Selecting a program  
Using the button  
Additional information:  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Via iDrive  
Brake settings can be configured in M Setup.  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Brake  
Additional information:  
Principle  
The sensitivity of the brake pedal motions to  
the braking response can be adjusted.  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-  
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually.  
General information  
The system detects the following unstable  
driving conditions, for instance:  
SETUP  
214  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
General information  
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-  
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
2. "DSC OFF"  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Warning  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in  
critical driving situations. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. Drive  
with roof load only with activated Dynamic  
Stability Control.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
After deactivating Dynamic Stability Control,  
the program for M xDrive can be selected di-  
rectly.  
Dynamic Stability Control settings can be con-  
figured in M Setup.  
Additional information:  
Overview  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
View when Dynamic Stability  
Control is deactivated.  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
215  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to  
the driving circumstances.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control has failed or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has  
failed.  
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabi-  
lizing interventions are carried out only to a  
reduced extent. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust driving  
style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate Do not jerk the steering wheel in  
response to a warning.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
M Dynamic Mode  
Overview  
Principle  
Button in the vehicle  
M Dynamic Mode allows a ride with high longi-  
tudinal and lateral acceleration but with limited  
driving stability.  
Only in the absolute limit range does the sys-  
tem intervene for stabilization by reducing the  
engine power and by brake interventions on  
the wheels. In this driving condition, additional  
steering corrections may be necessary.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active  
M xDrive mode is: "4WD SPORT" when M Dy-  
namic Mode is activated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Activate/deactivate the function  
You may find it useful to briefly activate the  
system under the following special circumstan-  
ces:  
1.  
Press the button to open the selection  
menu.  
2. "MDM"  
M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
▷
When rocking the vehicle free from deep  
snow or driving off from loose ground.  
▷
With an increased need for dynamics or  
longitudinal acceleration, for instance when  
driving on a race track.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control.  
216  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Overview  
Icon  
Description  
Button in the vehicle  
Display active and indicator  
light illuminates:  
M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
warning light also flashes:  
SETUP  
M Dynamic Mode controls the  
driving and brake power.  
Indicator and warning lights il-  
luminate:  
Programs  
There arethree M xDrive programs available  
when the DSC Dynamic Stability Control is de-  
activated.  
The M Dynamic Mode or the  
Dynamic Stability Control has  
malfunctioned.  
Program  
Distribution of driving forces  
"4WD"  
Front and rear axles.  
M xDrive  
"4WD  
SPORT"  
Front and rear axles.  
Main component, rear axle.  
Principle  
"2WD"  
Rear axle.  
M xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the  
vehicle. The M xDrive and the Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control work together to optimize the trac-  
tion and driving dynamics. M xDrive variably  
distributes the drive forces to the front and rear  
axles as demanded by the driving situation  
and road condition.  
A program is activated automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When the drive-ready state is switched on:  
"4WD".  
When the M Dynamic Mode is activated:  
"4WD SPORT".  
When Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-  
vated: "4WD".  
Selecting a program  
General information  
Changing programs in dynamic driving situa-  
tions is not possible.  
217  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
ning even when the Dynamic Stability Control  
Using the button  
is turned off and in M Dynamic Mode, and thus  
enables optimum traction in all driving situa-  
tions.  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
Via iDrive  
M xDrive settings can be configured in M  
Setup.  
Integral Active Steering  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Principle  
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-  
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more  
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-  
bility is also increased at high speeds.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light is illumi-  
nated and 4WD appears in the  
instrument cluster:  
General information  
Integral Active Steering combines variable  
sport steering with active rear-wheel steering.  
Program is activated.  
The rear-wheel steering acts to increase ma-  
neuverability at low speeds by turning the rear  
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the  
front wheels.  
The indicator light is illumi-  
nated and 4WD Sport appears  
in the instrument cluster:  
Program is activated.  
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned  
in the same direction as the front wheels. For  
instance, this results in a harmonious lane  
change.  
2WD display is active and indi-  
cator light illuminates:  
Program is activated.  
In critical driving situations, integral active  
steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-  
ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.  
when oversteering.  
Warning light illuminates:  
Setting  
The M xDrive system may not  
be operational. Have the vehi-  
cle checked immediately.  
The system offers several different settings.  
Using the settings in M setup, you can set the  
system to comfortable or dynamic.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Active M differential  
The active M differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial depending on the driving situation. This  
prevents an individual rear wheel from spin-  
Using snow chains  
In order to guarantee free movement of the  
wheels when operating with snow chains,  
218  
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
rear-wheel steering must be turned off when  
snow chains are mounted.  
Additional information:  
Rear-wheel steering during operation with  
snow chains, refer to page 342.  
Malfunction  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The steering system may not be operational.  
Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-  
ger be provided.  
▷
▷
▷
Larger steering movements are required at  
low speeds.  
The response of the vehicle is more sensi-  
tive in higher speed ranges.  
Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-  
tory driving.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
219  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Vehicle features and options Speed Limit Info  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Speed Limit Info  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
Speed warning  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
General information  
The system may also show speed limits that  
apply to routes that are not signposted if the  
navigation system has current map data.  
Another speed warning is given when the set  
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-  
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Settings  
The Speed Limit Warning can be activated or  
deactivated. In addition, the speed limit for the  
warning can be configured.  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
220  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Warning signals  
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Safety information  
Settings  
Warning  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
▷
Camera, refer to page 39.  
Icon  
Description  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Current speed limit.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
Speed Limit Info deactivated.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
221  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Safety information  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Speed control systems  
Principle  
The speed control systems provide support  
when driving.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the speed con-  
trol systems include the following individual  
systems.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 239.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the individual systems are en-  
hanced with additional functions.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Speed control systems are only available in  
ROAD drive mode.  
Set speed.  
Some functions can be operated via voice con-  
trol.  
Additional information:  
Turning on/selecting speed control  
systems  
M Mode, refer to page 211  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 57.  
1.  
Turn on: press the button.  
2.  
Select: when the system is active,  
press the button repeatedly until the de-  
222  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
sired speed control system is displayed in  
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
manually  
Icon  
Speed control system  
▷
▷
Press the button.  
Cruise control.  
Press button to select another  
speed control system.  
Distance control.  
Continuing speed control systems  
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control  
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-  
tance with lane keeping.  
Press the button.  
The activated system is shown in green.  
Turning off speed control systems  
automatically  
The speed control systems turn off automati-  
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.  
The system is shown in white when the sys-  
tem can be activated.  
The system is grayed out if the system has  
failed or if the functional requirements are not  
met.  
Turning off speed control systems  
manually  
Interrupting speed control systems  
automatically  
Depending on the system, speed control  
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
Press and hold this button.  
The speed control systems are turned  
off and the displays extinguish.  
Adjusting speed values  
▷
When moving from selector lever position D  
to P, N, or R.  
Repeatedly press the rocker button on  
the steering wheel up or down until the  
desired value is set.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
While M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
to the resistance point, the set speed in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Each time the rocker button is pressed past  
the resistance point, the set speed changes  
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
223  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Safety information  
Marking on speedometer  
Warning  
A mark for the set speed ap-  
pears on the speedometer.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Notifications  
In addition to the respective indicator lights,  
notifications are displayed for some functions.  
Warning  
The scope of notifications can be set.  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
6. "Notifications"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-  
erty damage. Only use the system if driving  
at constant speed is possible.  
Cruise Control  
Principle  
Warning  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle settings, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions.  
224  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when cruise control is  
switched on.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 222.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Adjusting the speed  
Store current speed.  
Store/maintain speed  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Press the rocker button up or down  
once while the system is stopped.  
Set speed.  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
Turning on the Cruise Control  
In vehicles with distance control: change the  
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control  
without distance control.  
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-  
ter.  
When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,  
the current speed can also be stored by press-  
ing a button:  
Additional information:  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Press the button.  
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the  
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
Changing the speed  
Repeatedly press the rocker button up  
or down until the desired speed is set.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored  
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed  
when the road is clear.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.  
The maximum adjustable speed depends on  
the vehicle and the set hybrid system charac-  
teristic.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Press rocker button to resistance point and  
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates  
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.  
225  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle  
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing  
the switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Marking on speedometer  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
Continuing cruise control  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
At the stored speed  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Indicator light  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Press the button with the system inter-  
rupted.  
System limits  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
Distance control  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Principle  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-  
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to  
the Cruise Control.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
At the current speed  
Press the rocker button up or down to  
continue cruise control at the current  
speed.  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
Speed Limit Assistant: at the  
suggested speed  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
When a speed is suggested, press the  
button to accept the Cruise Control at  
the suggested speed.  
226  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by  
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-  
ing the button for the speed setting on the  
steering wheel.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Warning  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
Warning  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic transmission: Make sure that  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
227  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Turning on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until distance control is selected.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
The selected distance to a vehicle driving  
ahead is maintained.  
Store current speed.  
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control activates when Distance Control is  
switched on.  
Sensors  
Adjusting the speed  
The speed can be set using the rocker button  
on the steering wheel.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Interrupting Cruise Control with  
Distance Control automatically  
The system is stopped automatically in the fol-  
lowing situations, for example:  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
While M Dynamic Mode is activated.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
▷
▷
Driver's seat belt and driver's door are  
opened.  
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
228  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
The mark on the speedometer  
illuminates gray.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
Cruise control can be continued as follows:  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.  
The speed control system can be turned off or  
canceled automatically or manually.  
▷
Press the rocker button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 222.  
▷
Press the button on the left side of  
the steering wheel.  
Continuing cruise control while  
driving  
Distance  
Safety information  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
is a risk of accidents and risk of property  
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic  
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to  
the traffic and weather conditions and main-  
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly  
by braking.  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Adjusting the distance  
1.  
Apps menu  
Continuing cruise control while  
vehicle is stationary  
In certain situations, this system requires the  
driver to confirm their intention to drive off.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The displays show the following:  
6. "Distance control"  
229  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
7. "Distance"  
6. "Distance control"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"  
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: the system can be set so that  
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-  
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-  
tem analyzes the traffic situation and ambient  
conditions, e.g., poor visibility.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Marking on speedometer  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
6. "Distance control"  
7. "Situational distance control"  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Icon  
Description  
Safety information  
White indicator light:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Turning Cruise Control without distance control  
on or off:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
230  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Distance too short.  
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
System limits  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 39.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Radar sensors, refer to page 40.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
Detection range  
Assisted View  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
Set speed  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
Depending on the equipment, some system  
information can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
For oncoming traffic.  
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
switched off.  
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 138.  
231  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Merging vehicles  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
Cornering  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance  
Control with Steering Assistance and lane  
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-  
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-  
232  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
pose, the system executes supporting steering  
movements, for instance when cornering.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients  
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-  
cles in front.  
Button Function  
Turn last active speed control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Interrupt and continue speed control  
systems.  
If a lane boundary is crossed, the system is-  
sues a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.  
The steering wheel vibration intensity can be  
adjusted.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Store current speed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver Attention  
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the  
driver's attention.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
Safety information  
Sensors  
Warning  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Sensors in steering wheel.  
▷
▷
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national-market version: Driver Attention  
Camera  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below  
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
Sufficient lane width.  
233  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
Drive in the center of the lane.  
▷
Depending on the equipment: at a  
speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.  
With strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Distance control is active.  
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, when  
the driver turns the steering wheel while the  
turn signal is switched on.  
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.  
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Depending on the equipment:  
Side-collision warning is active.  
▷
▷
When the lane is too narrow.  
If a lane boundary is not detected and there  
is no vehicle driving in front.  
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode  
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
interrupted.  
1.  
If necessary, press the button.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
2.  
If necessary, press the button re-  
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-  
lected.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Icon  
Description  
The system is active and helps to keep  
the vehicle in the lane.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
When the system is switched on, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the  
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-  
tive.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode  
automatically  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the  
following situations:  
Warning light flashes yellow and  
steering wheel vibrates:  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
System interruption is imminent.  
234  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Icon  
Description  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will be  
interrupted very soon.  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two  
LEDs above the keypads illuminate.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
The steering wheel displays can be turned on/  
off.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle  
equipment and national-market ver-  
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-  
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-  
tem interruption is imminent.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Light elements"  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel  
with your hands and pay attention to  
the surrounding traffic.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-  
era detects that the driver is inattentive.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
This setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
235  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
System limits  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaning-  
fully used in certain situations.  
Short-term interruptions in case of already  
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Lane Change Assistant  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant helps when  
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.  
Lane changes can be triggered by operating  
the turn signal lever.  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts  
also apply.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Safety information  
System limits of the sensors  
Warning  
Additional information:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 39.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 40.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
236  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
Functional requirements  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction or by op-  
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
▷
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-  
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-  
ing traffic such as crash barriers.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient  
distance behind your own vehicle since be-  
ginning the drive.  
Icon  
Description  
Steering wheel icon and lane change  
arrow icon are green:  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
The system performs a lane change  
in the arrow direction.  
Maximum speed approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
Steering wheel icon is green and line  
for lane marking on respective side is  
gray:  
Turning on/turning off Lane Change  
Assistant  
1.  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Lane Change Assistant"  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
System limits  
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system  
apply.  
2. Start the lane change.  
▷
To initiate the lane change, press the  
turn signal lever in the desired direction  
to the resistance point.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
the turn signal lever can also be pressed  
beyond the resistance point.  
After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-  
tiates a lane change.  
237  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Functional requirements  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-  
tivated.  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
Lane change with active  
guidance  
A situation-dependent minimum speed has  
been reached.  
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap  
in traffic in the adjacent lane.  
Principle  
Lane change with active guidance assists the  
driver when lane changes are necessary to  
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed  
on the instrument cluster. A slight jolt can also  
be felt on the steering wheel, depending on  
national-market version and settings.  
A crossable lane boundary on the side of  
the desired lane change is detected.  
Destination guidance is active on the navi-  
gation system.  
The function is not available when using  
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or  
Android Auto.  
General information  
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode  
sensors.  
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Switching lane change on/off with  
active destination guidance  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-  
sisted Driving alerts also apply.  
Switching the steering wheel jerk  
on/off  
You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-  
tance on/off.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
238  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
5. "Driving"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Steering wheel impulse"  
Icon  
Function  
Indicates a necessary lane change.  
The icon varies depending on the  
traffic situation.  
Changing lanes  
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-  
igation destination, a corresponding notice is  
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-  
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering  
wheel.  
A green checkmark on the icon indi-  
cates that the function is active.  
A red cross on the icon indicates that  
the system cannot assist with the  
lane change.  
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the  
instrument cluster.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the traffic situation is displayed  
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.  
1.  
The system detects a suitable gap  
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A  
green checkmark is displayed on the lane  
change icon on the instrument cluster. The  
system prepares for the lane change.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
System limits  
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-  
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and  
Driver Attention Camera apply.  
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed  
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level  
with the opening.  
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane  
change suggestion.  
Additional information:  
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane  
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into  
the next lane.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change  
Assistant: the Lane Change Assistant can  
be started, e.g., by operating the turn signal  
after the Check Control message appears.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Lane  
Change Assistant: Once the Check Control  
message appears, a lane change can be  
started by checking the adjacent lane.  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-  
tance with guiding the vehicle in traffic jams on  
select highways.  
5. If necessary, the system automatically  
starts additional lane changes.  
The system increases driving comfort in suita-  
ble driving situations.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
239  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Safety information  
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Warning  
Additional information:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply to  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:  
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-  
able in the country in which the vehicle is  
driven.  
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode have been met.  
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the  
LED displays on the steering wheel are  
switched on.  
Warning  
This system is only intended for use on  
roads with structural separation from oncom-  
ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the  
system limits, the system can also remain ac-  
tive on roads without structural separations  
and may not react as expected. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-  
age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on  
roads without structural separations.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without pe-  
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-  
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.  
Sufficient lane width.  
Sufficiently wide curve radius.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
The navigation system must clearly identify  
the road and vehicle position.  
▷
▷
▷
This function must be available on the road  
on which the vehicle is driving.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
Antennas located in the roof must not be  
covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
Overview  
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.  
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Switching Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus on/off  
1.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Apps menu  
Side radar sensors, front.  
2. "Vehicle"  
240  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Displays on the steering wheel  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically  
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active  
and all functional requirements for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus have been met.  
To activate this function, remove your hands  
from the steering wheel. Remain ready to steer  
and brake at all times.  
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate  
depending on the situation.  
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is shown in green.  
Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
▷
Grab the steering wheel immediately with  
your hands.  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
Additional information:  
When the system is switched on, the following  
functions are enabled:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Side collision mitigation.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on the equipment, the system in-  
formation can also be displayed in the Head-  
up display.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
System limits  
The system limits of the following systems ap-  
ply:  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Sensors of the vehicle.  
Indicator light is white: System can be  
used.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 207.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
241  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.  
Button Function  
Distance control.  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
Set speed, refer to page 222.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-  
tem and national-market version, the value  
can be applied automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Safety information  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. "Speed limits"  
8. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on  
the equipment, detected speed limits  
are applied automatically.  
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
242  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
When the SET icon is displayed, press  
the button.  
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
Speed adjustment  
Principle  
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort  
functions will be turned off.  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 220.  
General information  
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an  
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up  
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a speed control sys-  
tem are activated.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
Icon  
Function  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1.  
Apps menu  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"  
7. Select the desired setting:  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance  
for speed adjustments, which applies to  
all speed limits.  
Automatic adoption  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-  
activate additional speed adaptation.  
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-  
matically adopts any detected speed limits  
when driving on roads with barriers separating  
traffic in opposing directions.  
"Adjust speed limits": with activated  
additional speed adjustment, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
After an automatic adoption, the button  
can be pressed to switch back to the  
last set value of the desired speed.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually to the active speed control system.  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
243  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cruise Control without Distance Control: for  
system related reasons, the speed limits can-  
not be applied automatically.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 242.  
Additional information:  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to  
page 221.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 39.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-  
vated.  
Adapting the speed to the  
route  
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.  
With navigation system: guidance is acti-  
vated.  
The use of navigation software via Apple  
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-  
tional limitations, for instance deviations  
with navigation instructions.  
Principle  
The system can be configured so that with  
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the  
speed automatically to the route.  
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations as necessary:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
Adapting speed automatically to  
route  
1.  
Apps menu  
In front of an exit ramp on highways or  
highway-like roads.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Safety information  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Adjusting the cornering speed  
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-  
ing on national-market version.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted  
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts  
also apply.  
6. "Route and intersection assistant"  
244  
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
7. "Cornering speed"  
8. Select the desired setting.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 153.  
System limits  
Depending on the national-market version or  
country in which the vehicle is currently being  
driven, the function may not be available.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
▷
On wintry roads.  
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-  
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed  
Limit Assist systems apply.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 224.  
Distance Control, refer to page 226.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 242.  
245  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 262.  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
▷
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 267.  
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 271.  
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 272.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Parking assistance systems  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 251.  
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer  
to page 252.  
Overview  
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 252.  
Button in the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 253.  
3D view, refer to page 253.  
Car wash view, refer to page 254.  
Panorama View, refer to page 254.  
Automatic activation of panorama view, re-  
fer to page 255.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 256.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 256.  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 257.  
Park assistance button  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 260.  
Sensors  
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 261.  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
246  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Depending on the national-market version, ei-  
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-  
era perspective is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Operating concept  
Turning display on/off  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be viewed by  
selecting the appropriate icon.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance  
systems can be configured individually.  
With reverse gear  
Some parking assistance systems can be  
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving  
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-  
play is automatically switched on if selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
Additional information:  
With the Park Assist key  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 57.  
Press the button.  
Calling up Park menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
Via iDrive  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Apps menu  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Parking"  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The instrument cluster shows displays of some  
parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-  
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Display  
Principle  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse  
your vehicle.  
247  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking view  
1
Status of parking assistance systems  
Assisted View  
2
3
1
Toolbar, left  
Selection menu  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image  
Selection window  
Automatic camera perspective  
Semi-automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
Display on the control display  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the  
activated parking assistance system, the con-  
trol display will vary.  
Toolbar, right  
Toolbar, left  
Assistance view  
Different views and settings can be selected  
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-  
ment:  
▷
"Parking view"  
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera  
views or the Park Distance Control view are  
displayed.  
▷
"Assist view"  
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-  
played.  
1
Toolbar, left  
▷
▷
"Panorama view"  
The cross traffic view is displayed.  
"More"  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle  
is displayed.  
"Car wash view"  
Your own lane can be displayed to make  
it easier to drive into a car wash.  
"Camera cleaning"  
248  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-  
view camera can be switched on as  
needed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
No search for parking assistance  
system offers.  
▷
"Settings"  
No other parking assistance sys-  
tems available.  
Settings can be entered in the Park  
menu.  
Parking assistance systems have  
failed.  
Toolbar, right  
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar.  
Search for parking assistance sys-  
tem offers is active.  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
White: an available maneuver is se-  
lected but is not being performed.  
Functional requirements have not  
been met or the functions transfer  
has been completed.  
Available parking methods of the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.  
Green: parking assistance system is  
active. Functions are controlled de-  
pending on the system activated.  
Additional information in case of malfunc-  
tions.  
Maneuver Assistant records the  
maneuver to be stored.  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
The status of parking assistance systems is  
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of  
the control display, in the status area on the in-  
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,  
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition  
to this icon, text also appears on the control  
display.  
Additional displays  
General information  
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-  
era image of the display of the parking assis-  
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make  
parking and maneuvering easier.  
The following parking assistance systems are  
displayed:  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Maneuver Assistant.  
Turning additional displays on/off  
Back-up Assistant.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
249  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Using parking aid lines  
Parking aid lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
Pathway lines  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind  
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-  
age.  
Turning circle lines  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-  
sible turning circle on a level road.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
250  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
Rearview camera  
Safety information  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Additional views can be shown on the display,  
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.  
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 39.  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
Field of view  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
rearview camera is automatically switched on  
if selector lever position R is engaged.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
1.  
Press the button.  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
icon in the selection window is selected au-  
tomatically.  
251  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
To exit rearview camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window  
or press the button again.  
General information  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side  
Park Distance Control as necessary.  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the cargo area is open, the  
camera image is displayed with gray shading.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic  
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and  
the system uses a semi-automatic camera  
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the  
automatic camera perspective when reverse  
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-  
spective will then be maintained for the current  
parking operation.  
Semi-automatic camera  
perspective  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Principle  
Depending on the parking direction and en-  
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera  
perspective is displayed with the areas in front  
of or behind the vehicle.  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' display  
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is  
selected automatically.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the semi-automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
The icon in the selection window is selected  
automatically.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon in the selection window.  
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Automatic camera  
perspective  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
The icon in the selection window is se-  
lected automatically.  
Principle  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window or press the button again.  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction.  
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-  
ing situation.  
252  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The side view looks from rear to front and, in  
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-  
sible obstacles.  
Side protection  
Principle  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the side view on/off  
Display  
The selection window lets you choose the side  
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired vehicle  
side in the selection window.  
To exit the side view, select another cam-  
era view in the selection window.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
3D view  
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.  
Principle  
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the  
vehicle top view in the selection window.  
Specified perspectives can be selected on the  
circle.  
System limits  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
General information  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
Side view  
1.  
Press the button.  
"More"  
2.  
3.  
Principle  
"3D view"  
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
To exit the 3D view, select another camera  
view on the left toolbar.  
253  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Car wash view  
Panorama View  
Principle  
Principle  
The car wash view assists when entering a car  
wash.  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view  
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and  
intersections.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-  
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-  
era cover the side of the vehicle.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
1.  
Press the button.  
"More"  
2.  
3.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-  
tion can turn on automatically when activation  
points are saved.  
"Car wash view"  
To exit the car wash view, select a different  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function  
can be used when driving forward or in re-  
verse.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving  
into a car wash.  
▷
▷
Rearview camera.  
Depending on the equipment: front camera.  
This view can be used to position the vehicle  
correctly within the washing system guide rails.  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll  
freely forward.  
1.  
Press the button.  
"Panorama view"  
Additional information:  
2.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 124.  
To exit panorama view, select another  
camera view on the left toolbar.  
254  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
Display  
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-  
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to  
a stored activation point.  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you  
want the system to turn on, then stop.  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the  
bumpers of your own vehicle.  
2.  
3.  
Press the button.  
"Panorama view"  
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing  
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-  
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-  
played when forward gear is engaged.  
4. "Activation point"  
The current position is displayed.  
5. "Save activation point"  
Activation points are saved with the following  
information, for example:  
Automatic activation of  
panorama view  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
With the GPS coordinates.  
Principle  
You can rename the location and street infor-  
mation created automatically.  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-  
vation points.  
Using activation points  
The use of activation points can be switched  
on and off.  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The activation points can be used when driv-  
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-  
ket version, when reversing.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance  
systems chapter.  
6. "GPS-based"  
Functional requirements  
▷
A GPS signal must be received.  
▷
Depending on national-market version: A  
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.  
255  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Editing activation points  
You can rename or delete specific activation  
points or all of them.  
System limits  
The system does not provide a warning of ap-  
proaching road users.  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
1.  
Press the button.  
"Panorama view"  
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the  
control display does not overlap with any other  
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to  
other objects.  
2.  
3. "Manage points"  
A list of all saved activation points is dis-  
played.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Door opening angle  
Remote 3D View  
Principle  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automatically  
when stationary.  
The My BMW App and camera views in park-  
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-  
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-  
roundings on a mobile device.  
This display helps estimate how far the doors  
can be opened when parking.  
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-  
tion.  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two hours.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Display  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
256  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Data protection, refer to page 68.  
Park Distance Control  
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
Principle  
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with  
an existing ConnectedDrive account must  
be activated.  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
The function can be activated or deactivated  
individually or together with other functions.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
1.  
Apps menu  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
After activation, Remote 3D View can be  
accessed using the My BMW App.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits  
The system may not be fully operational or  
may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark  
fields in the display indicate areas that are  
not recorded by the system.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-  
tion.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
257  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
The automatic activation of detected obstacles  
can be activated or deactivated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Turning off the system automatically  
Adjusting the volume  
The volume of the acoustic warning can be  
adjusted.  
When driving forward, the system turns off au-  
tomatically as needed when a certain distance  
or speed is exceeded.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning the system on/off manually  
2. "Vehicle"  
Press the button.  
3. "Driving settings"  
258  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
6. "PDC signal volume"  
7. Set the desired value.  
Depending on national-market  
version: Turn off acoustic warning  
Depending on national-market version, the  
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-  
forming a parking maneuver.  
Press  
the icon in the status field at the top  
of the control display.  
When the Park Distance Control is switched  
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically  
switched on again.  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
Visual warning  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display and in the instrument cluster as  
soon as the system is activated.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
▷
▷
▷
Gray shaded area: Sensor detection range.  
No obstacles were detected within detec-  
tion range.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-  
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for  
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear  
and front.  
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to  
the vehicle has not yet been detected.  
System limits  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
General information  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
259  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-  
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are  
hidden after a certain time. The area on the  
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
sensor detection range may not be shown on  
the control display.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
Rearview camera.  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
260  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
Drive-off monitoring  
After emergency braking, the function can be  
temporarily deactivated on the control display.  
A corresponding message is displayed.  
Principle  
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-  
itoring reduces the drive power when driving  
off.  
1. "Configure"  
2. "Deactivate temporarily"  
General information  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will  
occur.  
When obstacles are detected in close range in  
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-  
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual  
braking.  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-  
cle, the system will brake.  
Settings  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Safety information  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
System limits  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
261  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-  
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.  
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,  
nearly to the end point.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-  
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-  
tion and obstacle detection.  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
In addition, the system makes it easier to  
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
6. "Drive off monitoring"  
7. "Drive off monitoring"  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
The system calculates the best possible park-  
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,  
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically turned on again at the  
next drive.  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
Canceling reduced drive power  
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in  
the following situations:  
Parking.  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
After the accelerator pedal has been de-  
pressed completely twice.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven out  
of the parking space without further steering  
movements.  
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.  
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by  
covering a certain distance, the drive power is  
released gradually.  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the  
parking space to enable continued driving in  
the desired direction.  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
262  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
increases the comfort and range of uses of  
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to  
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are  
marked with lines is possible.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-  
neuver can also be performed using Remote  
Control Parking on a smartphone.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the  
road.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward  
parking perpendicular to the road.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
263  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
Measurement of parking spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
Park Assist Professional: Parking in parking  
spaces with parking lines.  
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:  
Sensors  
▷
The parking space must be clearly marked  
with lines.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
The one-time calibration of the camera af-  
ter vehicle delivery must be complete. Drive  
a few kilometers in daylight to do so.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional  
is additionally controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
264  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Leaving parking spaces  
Turning parking operation display  
on/off  
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-  
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the  
camera image on the control display.  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has  
been detected in the area around the vehi-  
cle.  
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected in  
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The  
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-  
ches/15 cm.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
6. "Show assistance info"  
Displays  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces  
can be turned on and off.  
General information  
The current status of parking assistance sys-  
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on  
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Different icons are shown on the control dis-  
play for selecting the parking method.  
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-  
sponds to the prioritized parking option.  
6. "Sound when available"  
The direction of the arrow changes for the  
icons for parking methods for driving out of a  
parking space.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.  
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.  
Reverse perpendicular parking.  
Forward perpendicular parking.  
The parking space search is activated  
and displayed on the instrument cluster.  
2. Press the  
gear.  
button or engage reverse  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display and in the instrument  
cluster.  
265  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
3. On the control display: Select one of the  
parking maneuvers offered. You can switch  
to another parking maneuver as necessary.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
Green: the system takes control of the  
parking operation.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled  
without engaging selector lever position P.  
Driving can continue immediately.  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
2.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
3. On the control display: select the desired  
parking method.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
With open cargo area.  
In the instrument cluster: select suggested  
parking method with the knurled wheel on  
the steering wheel.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
Green: the system takes control of ma-  
neuvering.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
266  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
the ground. The system orients itself ac-  
cording to objects.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
When the system is automatically aborted, se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has been  
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if  
needed.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be  
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Maneuver Assistant  
Principle  
No parking assistance  
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for  
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
Parking and maneuvering operations can be  
recorded and then carried out automatically by  
the system.  
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking  
spaces that are only marked with lines on  
267  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Detection range  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and  
thereby recorded.  
When the vehicle reaches the activation area  
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-  
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-  
trol display or in the instrument cluster.  
The detection range for a maneuver is divided  
into the following areas:  
After the activation, the system takes control  
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver  
automatically.  
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will  
begin with the localization in the back-  
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m  
around the distance covered of a stored  
maneuver.  
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-  
formed using Remote Control Parking on a  
smartphone.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-  
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,  
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the  
control display.  
Safety information  
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored  
maneuver on the control display can be ac-  
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.  
After the activation, the system takes con-  
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-  
neuver automatically.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors and cameras:  
268  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-  
tion.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Front camera.  
The maneuver is recorded.  
When recording a route, do not drive faster  
than 9 mph/15 km/h.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
While recording, the distance covered will  
be displayed.  
When the maximum distance covered or  
the maximum speed is reached, a message  
will be displayed and a signal tone will  
sound.  
Functional requirement  
To use the Maneuver Assistant, the one-off  
calibration process of the camera after vehicle  
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilome-  
ters in daylight to do so.  
5. Vehicle stationary: "Save recording".  
6. To assign a name to the recorded maneu-  
ver, tap the name.  
Recording maneuver  
7. Enter a name and confirm.  
8. Save your selection.  
General information  
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-  
ent locations.  
Do not move the vehicle until the recording  
has been stored.  
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-  
corded.  
Performing stored maneuver  
Identical maneuvers under different ambient  
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-  
tions.  
1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range  
and stop. The control display and instru-  
ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-  
ver can be activated.  
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-  
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.  
2.  
: activate stored maneuver.  
In total, a distance covered of approx.  
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible  
maneuvers can be recorded.  
Green: after activation, the system takes  
control of the vehicle and performs the ma-  
neuver automatically. If applicable, follow  
the instructions on the control display or in  
the instrument cluster.  
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less  
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
Recording maneuver  
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from  
which a maneuver must be recorded and  
stop.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
manually  
The vehicle can be controlled manually during  
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-  
tions:  
2.  
3.  
Press the button.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
"Record new path"  
269  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice  
in succession.  
and follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play or in the instrument cluster.  
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
Editing stored maneuvers  
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or  
renamed.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without  
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can  
continue immediately.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking"  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
6. "Recorded paths"  
7. Select the maneuver to be edited.  
8. Select the desired action.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
System limits  
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.  
With open cargo area.  
With open hood.  
Functional limitations  
System limits can cause functional limitations  
such as in the following situations:  
With the doors open.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.  
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors and cameras are reached.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
In case of recorded maneuvers where the  
system minimum distance to objects can-  
not be maintained.  
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the distance covered, for in-  
stance other tires or changed ambient con-  
ditions like light conditions or weather.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
In case of obstacles.  
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-  
neuvers when driving into the activation  
area.  
In the event of an automatic cancellation of  
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a  
complete stop and selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
In multi-story parking garages, for record-  
ings at different parking levels, or for re-  
cordings that run over several parking lev-  
els.  
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if  
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again  
270  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
If the calibration process for the cam-  
era is not completed after vehicle deliv-  
ery, an icon appears on the display of  
the parking assistance systems when reverse  
gear is engaged.  
General information  
Note the information in the Automatic Parking  
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.  
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized  
use.  
Tap the icon and follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on for  
the duration of the maneuver.  
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist  
Professional is only available for Remote Con-  
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the  
vehicle.  
Remote Control Parking  
Principle  
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can  
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-  
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park  
Assist Professional.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.  
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
Make sure that no one is located within  
range of the maneuver.  
The maneuver is performed independently,  
without you having to be inside the vehicle, us-  
ing a smartphone and the My BMW App. This  
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.  
▷
Make sure that no one is located in the nar-  
row spaces between the vehicle and sta-  
tionary objects, e.g., between the vehicle  
and a garage wall.  
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,  
the vehicle's parking position can be corrected  
by maneuvering manually with the My BMW  
App.  
▷
To manually correct the vehicle position on  
the My BMW App, the minimum width of  
the parking space must be the vehicle width  
plus 1.9 ft/0.6 m.  
A maneuver that has already been started can  
be continued at any time with Remote Control  
Parking.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with Re-  
mote Control Parking.  
The My BMW App must be installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-  
nectedDrive account.  
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-  
phone.  
The distance between vehicle and smart-  
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
A valid digital key must be set up for the  
vehicle, then recognized without issue.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 87.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
271  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
tional equipment, the national-market version  
or the option for later enabling and software  
updates. This also applies to individual func-  
tions of the system.  
Parking with Remote Control  
Parking  
1. Engage selector lever position P.  
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and  
cargo area.  
For information on whether a function is cur-  
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-  
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My  
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-  
ward, or select the desired parking method.  
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.  
Additional information:  
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are  
present.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Depending on the option selected in the My  
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at  
the end of the parking maneuver or you can  
take control of the vehicle again.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
System limits  
The system takes over the steering. The driver  
must control the speed using the accelerator  
and brake pedals.  
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-  
tooth connection transmission due to external  
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-  
rupted.  
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m  
are stored.  
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is  
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive  
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not  
be available. Follow the instructions in the My  
BMW App.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: a maximum  
of 656 ft/200 m are stored.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking  
space. This function is offered on the My BMW  
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-  
tions.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the  
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready  
to take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Back-up assistant  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
272  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Green: the system takes control of  
steering.  
Warning  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto  
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic  
closely and actively intervene where appro-  
priate  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: suffi-  
ciently bright light conditions on the saved  
route.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
▷
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: the cam-  
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.  
▷
"Cancel": select the icon on the control  
display.  
Press the button.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: The one-  
off calibration of the camera after vehicle  
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilo-  
meters in daylight to do so.  
▷
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
2.  
3.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
"Start back-up Assistant"  
The length of the distance covered is dis-  
played on the control display and in the in-  
strument cluster.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
If applicable, follow the instructions on the  
control display or in the instrument cluster.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
273  
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor  
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164  
ft/50 m.  
System limits  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: for  
changed light conditions.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
274  
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Programs  
Vehicle features and options  
Program  
Suspension settings  
Comfort-oriented.  
Balanced out.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
"COMFORT"  
"SPORT"  
Additional information:  
"SPORT PLUS"  
Consistently sporty.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Selecting a program  
Adaptive M chassis  
Using the button  
Press the button and select the desired  
program on the control display.  
Principle  
By adjusting the running gear, the system re-  
duces movement of the vehicle body when  
driving in a sporty way or on uneven roads.  
Via iDrive  
Adaptive M running gear settings can be con-  
figured in M Setup.  
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv-  
ing comfort depending on the road condition  
and driving style.  
Additional information:  
M Setup, refer to page 209.  
Overview  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Button in the vehicle  
When the display for M Setup is acti-  
vated in the instrument cluster, the se-  
lected program is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 151  
SETUP  
275  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Fresh air.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Air flow.  
Additional information:  
Air distribution.  
SYNC program.  
Seat heating.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
Overview  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Rear window defroster.  
276  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
Rear automatic climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic program.  
Settings  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
▷
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.  
Pre-conditioning.  
Air conditioning when getting in.  
Air distribution.  
Seat heating.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Turning rear automatic climate  
control on/off  
Calling up climate control functions  
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:  
Functional requirements  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on  
the menu bar.  
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.  
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.  
Or:  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
3. "Climate control"  
2. "Individual settings"  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Rear climate control"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
The rear climate control can be activated with  
the default settings for temperature and the  
AUTO program:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
"Activate with default settings"  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
277  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Locking the rear automatic climate  
control  
Overview  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Lock rear climate control"  
1
Settings  
Automatic program  
2
3
4
5
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
Temperature  
Principle  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Seat heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
The automatic program cools, ventilates or  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
Temperature.  
2.  
Tap the AUTO program button.  
Seat heating.  
Switching the rear climate control  
automatic program on/off  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Via iDrive  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. "Automatic climate"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
278  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Via rear climate control display  
Temperature  
Tap the button.  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
General information  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Setting the temperature  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
The individually selected settings of the cli-  
mate control functions are stored and auto-  
matically set up again such as after the vehicle  
is started again.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
Display  
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-  
mation about the temperature difference be-  
tween the configured desired temperature and  
current interior temperature.  
Setting the rear automatic climate  
control temperature  
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature  
display indicates the progress of heating or  
cooling.  
Via iDrive  
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached  
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating, are indicated by the icons on the  
menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Second row of seats"  
4. Set the desired temperature.  
279  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Via rear climate control display  
The temperature can be set individually for the  
driver's side and front passenger side.  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
Set the desired temperature:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Footwell temperature  
Automatic program:  
General information  
The air temperature in the footwell can be ad-  
justed.  
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
Manual mode:  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
Adjusting the footwell temperature  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Adjusting the air volume of the rear  
climate control  
2. "Individual settings"  
Tap the icon on the rear climate control  
display to set the desired intensity.  
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"  
4. "Temperature adjustment for footwell"  
5. Increase or decrease temperature.  
Air distribution settings  
Air flow  
Principle  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the air distribution icon on the  
climate control functions bar.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
280  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-  
row 1.  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
Aim the air flow toward the upper body  
area, arrow 2.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-  
row 3.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
2.  
Tap the air conditioning button.  
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-  
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid  
window condensation.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
Adjusting the air distribution of the  
rear climate control  
Maximum cooling  
Tap the icon on the rear climate control  
display to set the desired air distribu-  
tion.  
Principle  
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-  
terior quickly and effectively.  
Air conditioning  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
Principle  
The function is automatically activated in the  
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
Functional requirement  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for maximum cooling:  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-  
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.  
▷
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
281  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Fresh air.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Automatic air recirculation.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
Air recirculation mode  
SYNC program  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Principle  
If the SYNC program is activated, the settings  
for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-  
senger's side and to the rear.  
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-  
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated  
depending on the outside air quality.  
For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-  
gram is deactivated, the following settings are  
adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-  
gram depending on seat occupancy:  
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside  
air is directed into the interior.  
▷
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,  
the settings for the driver's side are applied  
to the front passenger side.  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings for the rear are applied.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
When the seat is occupied again, the most re-  
cent settings are reapplied.  
General information  
The following settings can be applied:  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
282  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
Rear window defroster  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the settings on the front passenger side or in  
the rear are changed, the program is automati-  
cally switched off.  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
Press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
Defrost function  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the rear window heating is turned on.  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
If pre-conditioning is turned on, the rear win-  
dow defroster is activated as needed.  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
Seat heating  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
Principle  
The system heats the seats as necessary.  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
General information  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
Press the defrost button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
Adjusting seat heating  
The LED of the button is illuminated  
when the system is switched on.  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
283  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Adjusting the active seat ventilation  
manually  
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Press the seat heating button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
2.  
Press the seat ventilation button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Turning the rear automatic climate  
control seat heating on/off  
Steering wheel heating  
Tap the icon on the rear climate control  
display to set the desired heating out-  
put level.  
Principle  
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-  
essary.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
Automatic program  
Principle  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
The system cools the seat and backrest as  
necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat tempera-  
ture.  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Automatic program  
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity  
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you  
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted  
according to the set intensity.  
284  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Front ventilation  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrows 1.  
Adjustment of the air volume at the vent,  
arrows 2.  
2.  
Press the steering wheel heating  
button repeatedly until the desired level is  
selected, arrow 2.  
Ventilation in the rear  
Ventilation  
Principle  
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-  
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-  
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-  
cle.  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective air conditioning.  
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrows 1.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrows 2.  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
285  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Ventilation in the rear, on the side  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Pre-conditioning  
Principle  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle in-  
terior to a comfortable temperature, depend-  
ing on the inside/outside temperature, prior to  
starting a drive. This function makes it easier  
to remove snow and ice.  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
General information  
The pre-conditioning can be switched on and  
off directly or via a preset departure time.  
The air automatically exits through the air  
vents to the windshield, the side windows, the  
upper body area and into the footwell.  
Air quality  
The system switches off automatically after  
approx. 30 minutes or when the drive-ready  
state is activated.  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
Preconditioning the vehicle while it charges,  
makes it easier for the climate control system  
to regulate the temperature while driving. This  
increases the range.  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
▷
Pre-conditioning.  
▷
The high-voltage battery is sufficiently  
charged or the charging process is ongoing.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
If the high-voltage battery is deeply dis-  
charged, it may take some time for the pre-  
conditioning to be ready after the charging  
process is started.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
286  
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting and activating the departure  
time and the planned departure time to allow a  
sufficient period of time for the air conditioning.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
Turning on/turning off via iDrive  
Pre-conditioning will be turned off automati-  
cally a few minutes after the set departure  
time.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Setting the departure time  
2. "Pre-conditioning"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Turning on via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on using the vehi-  
cle key.  
2. "Pre-conditioning"  
3. "Departure plan"  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
4. Set the desired departure time.  
5. Select day of the week, if needed.  
After using the vehicle key, it takes ap-  
prox. 3 seconds until pre-conditioning turns on.  
Activating the departure time  
To turn on the pre-conditioning prior to a de-  
parture time, the respective departure time  
must be activated beforehand.  
Automatic switch-off  
To ensure that the vehicle is capable of start-  
ing, the preconditioning may turn off auto-  
matically, e.g., after repeated activation or be-  
cause the high-voltage battery has insufficient  
charge. If the preconditioning turns off because  
the vehicle has insufficient charge, charge the  
high-voltage battery. The pre-conditioning is  
then available again.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Pre-conditioning"  
3. "Pre-conditioning for departure"  
Display on the instrument cluster  
Air conditioning for departure time  
Icon  
Description  
General information  
Departure times can be set with time and day  
of the week.  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
Icon flashes: pre-condition-  
ing is switched on.  
The switch-on point is determined automati-  
cally based on the temperature.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will be  
turned on promptly before the set departure  
time.  
Activating with My BMW App  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on pre-conditioning at a preset departure  
time or immediately.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
287  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
risk of property damage. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and  
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-  
trolled system, arrow 3.  
288  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
▷
LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds: programming not com-  
pleted.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
2. Turn on standby state.  
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:  
▷
Program available button:  
Press the button.  
▷
Program already assigned button:  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions of the remote-controlled  
system.  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the remote-controlled system such as  
on the garage door.  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
programming is not complete.  
289  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the desired button of the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is triggered.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Safety information  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Warning  
Sun visor  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
Warning  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the  
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V  
electrical system. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only connect  
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the  
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-  
ment.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
290  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
In the front center console  
Front center armrest  
Two USB ports are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
The center armrest contains a socket.  
▷
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
In the rear center console  
USB port  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
Additional information:  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
Two USB ports are located in the center con-  
sole in the rear passenger compartment.  
Safety information  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
Warning  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Make sure to  
prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
291  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Attaching optional accessories  
1. Slide the cover down.  
Travel & Comfort system  
General information  
The front seat backrests have mounts and var-  
ious connection options:  
▷
Mounts for attaching optional accessories,  
e.g., universal holders for tablets or coat  
hangers.  
▷
USB ports.  
Properties of the USB ports:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-  
sembly Instructions.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per  
seat.  
Wireless charging tray  
For more information, contact an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Principle  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
Overview  
General information  
Quick charging functions are supported de-  
pending on the smartphone.  
The integrated fan cools the device to be  
charged.  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
The mounts for attaching optional accessories  
are located behind the marked covers, as are  
the USB ports.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
Safety information  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
292  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. When charging  
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device.  
Inserting a smartphone  
Place the smartphone in the middle of the tray  
on the driver's side, with the display facing up.  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Mobile phone reminder"  
1
Storage area  
Fan  
2
System limits  
Functional requirements  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
Charging function is turned on.  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
The smartphone cannot exceed maximum  
dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x  
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smartphone  
display is facing up.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Activating/deactivating charging  
1.  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Wireless charging"  
293  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
be verified in regular intervals, especially when  
borders are frequently crossed.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must  
be informed about the system. In addition, in-  
formation about the system is required when  
handing off the vehicle.  
Data transfer and data storage  
Whether recording data will be sent or stored  
depends on the recording function.  
Interior camera  
Principle  
Interior camera:  
The interior camera can be used to record the  
vehicle interior.  
▷
Data transfer to a mobile device, connec-  
tion to the vehicle via WLAN.  
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and assigned  
to the BMW ID or driver profile.  
General information  
The interior camera can provide the following  
functions:  
Remote Inside View:  
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My  
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive  
account.  
▷
Interior camera.  
You can record, save and display media.  
Remote Inside View.  
▷
▷
Data is saved to the My BMW App and,  
after data is sent, to the mobile device.  
The vehicle interior can be recorded using  
the My BMW App.  
Anti-theft recorder:  
▷
Anti-theft recorder.  
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My  
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive  
account.  
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle  
interior is automatically recorded. Record-  
ings can also be played using the My BMW  
App.  
▷
Data is stored in the vehicle and after the  
data transfer in the mobile device.  
More information on the scope and content of  
data processing is available on the Internet in  
the ConnectedDrive privacy notices/service de-  
scriptions.  
Data protection  
General information  
The permissibility of recording and using re-  
cordings is contingent upon the statutory regu-  
lations of the country in which the system is to  
be used. The user is responsible for the use of  
the system and compliance with the respective  
regulations.  
Occupying the seats  
The interior camera is also used for the detec-  
tion of occupied seats.  
When all doors are closed, the interior camera  
switches on automatically on a regular basis.  
This system analyzes the vehicle interior to  
detect which seats are occupied. No media  
recordings are made in the process. Two in-  
frared light sources next to the camera lens  
illuminate while the interior camera is active.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory  
restrictions on using the system in your region  
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the  
laws with respect to use of the system should  
294  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the lighting conditions, the infra-  
red light sources may be visible.  
Activating/deactivating interior  
camera  
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,  
the recording function and, if necessary, data  
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm  
the query on the control display. Additional  
activation may be required for some system  
functions.  
Functional requirements  
Interior camera:  
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.  
Data protection, refer to page 68.  
The camera is activated.  
▷
Follow applicable legal regulations.  
To transfer recordings to mobile devices:  
The recording function or data transfer can be  
deactivated or activated.  
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.  
Mobile device is connected to the vehicle  
via WLAN.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
Remote Inside View/Anti-theft recorder:  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Settings"  
▷
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.  
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-  
vice.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account.  
Interior camera  
▷
▷
Vehicle is parked and locked.  
Recording mode  
Anti-theft recorder: equipped with alarm  
system.  
Recording  
mode  
Function  
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible  
and are not partially or completely covered, for  
instance by face masks.  
"Single  
photo"  
Shortly after triggering, a  
photo will be taken.  
Overview  
"Smile"  
When the system detects a  
smile, a picture will be taken.  
"Self-timer  
(3 sec.)"  
After the timer has expired, a  
photo will be taken.  
"Burst  
mode"  
Shortly after triggering, a ser-  
ies of pictures will be taken.  
Take picture  
1.  
Apps menu  
The interior camera is located on the head-  
liner.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Photo"  
Additional information:  
Around the headliner, refer to page 37.  
5. Select desired recording mode.  
6. Triggering a photo.  
295  
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the selected recording mode,  
the photo occurs shortly after the triggering,  
when a smile is recognized or the timer has  
elapsed.  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
An individual gesture can be assigned for re-  
cordings with the interior camera.  
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be  
displayed as a preview.  
Remote Inside View  
Recordings of the vehicle interior can be  
played on a mobile device using the My BMW  
App in order to check the vehicle interior, e.g.,  
for forgotten objects.  
Recording video  
1. "MENU"  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Video"  
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-  
ple or animals left behind.  
5. Start video recording.  
You can only record video for a certain time.  
Anti-theft recorder  
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle in-  
terior is automatically recorded. The My BMW  
App issues a notification when recordings are  
being taken. The recording can be shown on a  
mobile device.  
Displaying and managing  
recordings  
Saved recordings can be displayed, transferred  
and deleted in the vehicle.  
Up to three recordings can be saved to the  
vehicle and synchronized with the My BMW  
App. If the vehicle is reset to factory settings,  
recordings saved to the vehicle are deleted.  
With some national-market versions, record-  
ings are only shown on the control display  
when the vehicle speed is less than approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h for safety reasons.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
4. "Gallery"  
5. Select the desired recording.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Scan the QR code shown on the control dis-  
play to send recordings to a mobile device.  
The recording is transferred when the pop-up  
on the mobile device is opened. The mobile  
device must be connected to the vehicle via  
WLAN.  
Settings  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Interior camera"  
296  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip  
pads.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Glove compartment  
Safety information  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Press the button.  
Warning  
Closing the glove compartment  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Fold the lid closed.  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to the  
glove compartment.  
After the glove compartment has been locked,  
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-  
out the integrated key, for example, when the  
car is being parked by a parking attendant.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 74.  
297  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Opening the center armrest  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Press the button.  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-  
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
property damage. Do not use any breakable  
objects while driving. Only stow breakable  
objects in closed storage compartments.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press both lids down until they engage.  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Storage tray in center  
console  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of property  
damage. Do not force objects into the cup  
holder. Make sure that drink containers are  
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do  
not transport hot beverages.  
The center console has storage compart-  
ments.  
Additional information:  
Wireless charging tray, refer to page 292.  
Front center armrest  
General information  
Storage compartments are located in the cen-  
ter armrest between the seats.  
298  
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Overview  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Two cup holders are located in the center arm-  
rest.  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Coat hooks  
General information  
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles  
in the rear.  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury and risk of property  
damage. Do not force objects into the cup  
holder. Make sure that drink containers are  
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do  
not transport hot beverages.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, and property damage. When  
suspending clothing articles from the coat  
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the  
driver's view.  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-  
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,  
from the coat hooks.  
299  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of property damage. Stow and secure objects  
and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of property damage. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
and property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs).  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-  
nected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
300  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the  
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
Payload  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.  
Overview  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Multifunction hook  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests  
to stow large cargo.  
General information  
A multifunction hook is located on the left and  
right side in the cargo area.  
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-  
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-  
gage compartment net.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.  
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-  
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-  
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear seat backrests.  
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as  
possible, directly behind and at the bottom  
301  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo  
area must be properly secured.  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
Weight  
Warning  
The multifunction hooks can only hold items  
with a maximum weight of 7 lbs/3 kg.  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Enlarging the cargo area  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of  
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and  
the center section can be folded down sepa-  
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded  
down together with the center section.  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
From the cargo area  
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center seat belt  
in the rear using the buckle tongue of an-  
other seat belt.  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down  
from the cargo area. The center section can be  
separately folded down from the rear.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue at the end of the  
belt into the specially designated fixture on  
the rear shelf.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
property damage. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the rear seat backrest including  
head restraint is clear when folding down.  
3. Push the corresponding head restraint  
down as far as it will go.  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo  
area to release the rear seat backrest. The  
302  
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward  
slightly.  
Locking/unlocking the center  
section  
You can lock the center section to prevent it  
from being folded down from the rear, e.g.,  
when handing your vehicle over to a valet  
parking service.  
1. Fold down the left rear seat backrest with  
middle section.  
2.  
▷
▷
To lock: Push the lock forward.  
To unlock: Push the lock backward.  
5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.  
3. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright  
seat position and engage it.  
Folding back the rear seat backrest  
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright  
seat position and engage it.  
2. Release the buckle tongue from the fixture  
on the rear shelf.  
3. Insert the buckle tongue in the belt lock of  
the center seat belt. Make sure you hear  
the buckle tongue engage.  
Folding down middle section  
Pull lever and fold the center section forward.  
303  
 

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
BMW iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Personal settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Light and view
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Parking
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Fourth Generation (2021-2026) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
Third  Generation (2014-2020) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Third  Generation (2014-2020) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
Seecond Generation (2007-2013) Skoda Fabia 4 Door Seecond Generation (2007-2013) Skoda Fabia 4 Door
First Generation (2008-2014) Hyundai I20 4 Door First Generation (2008-2014) Hyundai I20 4 Door
Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door Second Generation (2013-2019) Hyundai I10 4 Door
First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door First Generation (2007-2012) Hyundai I10 4 Door
→